100% found this document useful (1 vote)

980 views586 pages

G60 Generator Protection System.

Manual of Relay G60 generator protection system.

Uploaded by

Nguyen Tu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

980 views586 pages

G60 Generator Protection System.

Manual of Relay G60 generator protection system.

Uploaded by

Nguyen Tu

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 586

Title Page

g
G60 Revision: 5.5x Manual P/N: 1601-0110-S5 (GEK-113415D) Copyright 2009 GE Multilin

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

UR Series Instruction Manual

830715A2.CDR

E83849
RE

T GIS ERE

GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com
LISTED IND.CONT. EQ. 52TL

ISO9001:2000
EM

U LT I L

GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775

*1601-0110-S5*

Addendum

g
ADDENDUM

GE Multilin

This addendum contains information that relates to the G60 Generator Protection System, version 5.5x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113415D (revision S5) but are not included in the current G60 operations. The following functions and items are not yet available with the current version of the G60 relay: Signal sources SRC 5 and SRC 6. Version 4.0x and higher releases of the G60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J 8L, 8M, 8N, 8R. The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE CPU OLD 9A 9C 9D ----------------CT/VT 8A 8B 8C 8D ----NEW 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 9S 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R DESCRIPTION RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive ground 8CT/8VT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive ground 8CT/8VT with enhanced diagnostics

The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R, and 9S), and the old CT/VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed. All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GETTING STARTED

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5 CONFIGURING THE G60 FOR SOFTWARE ACCESS .................................... 1-7 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE....................................................... 1-9 CONNECTING TO THE G60 RELAY .............................................................. 1-15 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-16 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-16 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-16 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-17 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-17 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-17 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-17 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-18 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-18 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-19

1.2 UR OVERVIEW

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.4 UR HARDWARE

1.5 USING THE RELAY

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-2 REPLACEMENT MODULES ............................................................................. 2-4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-10 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-11 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-12 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-12 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-13 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-14 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-15 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-16 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-16 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-17 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-18 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-18 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-18

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

3. HARDWARE

3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-5 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-7 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-9 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ............................................................................... 3-10 CONTROL POWER ......................................................................................... 3-10 CT/VT MODULES ............................................................................................ 3-11 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 3-13 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-21

3.2 WIRING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ..............................................................................3-22 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS.....................................................................3-22 IRIG-B ...............................................................................................................3-26 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-27 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-29 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-29 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-30 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-33 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-35 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-35 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-36 C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-38 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-40 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE..............................3-40 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS .........................................................3-41 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE .................3-41 UPLOADING G60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE.........................................3-43 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS...................................................3-46

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

4. HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW ................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3 SETTINGS TEMPLATES ...................................................................................4-4 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS ................................4-8 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY.....................................................................4-10 FACEPLATE .....................................................................................................4-13 LED INDICATORS............................................................................................4-14 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS .......................................................................4-17 DISPLAY...........................................................................................................4-22 KEYPAD ...........................................................................................................4-22 BREAKER CONTROL ......................................................................................4-23 MENUS .............................................................................................................4-24 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-26

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS

5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5 SECURITY..........................................................................................................5-8 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ..................................................................................5-11 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-13 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-14 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-32 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-33 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-34 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-35 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-37 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-38 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-41 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-42 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-43 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-48

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.2.15 5.2.16 5.2.17 5.2.18 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 5.5.9 5.5.10 5.5.11 5.5.12 5.5.13 5.5.14 5.5.15 5.5.16 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.12 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.7.10 5.7.11 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ....................................................................... 5-49 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 5-51 TELEPROTECTION......................................................................................... 5-59 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 5-59 AC INPUTS ...................................................................................................... 5-61 POWER SYSTEM............................................................................................ 5-62 SIGNAL SOURCES ......................................................................................... 5-63 BREAKERS...................................................................................................... 5-66 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ............................................................................. 5-70 FLEXCURVES ................................................................................................. 5-73 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT.................................................................... 5-80 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC ............................................................... 5-96 FLEXLOGIC RULES .................................................................................. 5-106 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION........................................................................ 5-107 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ............................................................................. 5-107 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................. 5-112 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS................................................................................. 5-112 FLEXELEMENTS ....................................................................................... 5-113 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ........................................................................... 5-117 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-118 SETTING GROUP ......................................................................................... 5-118 DISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 5-119 POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................. 5-126 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL .............................................................................. 5-134 PHASE CURRENT ........................................................................................ 5-137 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-147 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-154 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-161 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ......................................................................... 5-164 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION ....................................................................... 5-166 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-170 LOSS OF EXCITATION ................................................................................. 5-180 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION .................................................................... 5-182 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................. 5-184 STATOR GROUND........................................................................................ 5-187 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-193 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-193 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-194 UNDERFREQUENCY.................................................................................... 5-200 OVERFREQUENCY ...................................................................................... 5-201 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE................................................................ 5-202 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION ......................................... 5-204 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-206 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-210 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-213 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-215 TRIP BUS....................................................................................................... 5-216 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-218 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-220 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-221 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-223 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-224 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-225 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-226 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-227 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-227 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS/OUTPUTS ...................................................... 5-231 IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS...................................................................... 5-233

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS 5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 DCMA INPUTS ...............................................................................................5-235 RTD INPUTS ..................................................................................................5-236 DCMA OUTPUTS ...........................................................................................5-238 TEST MODE ...................................................................................................5-242 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS...........................................................................5-242 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS.......................................................................5-243 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT TEST VALUES .........................................5-244

5.9 TESTING

6. ACTUAL VALUES

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU .........................................................................6-1 CONTACT INPUTS ............................................................................................6-4 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................6-4 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS .............................................................................6-5 CONTACT OUTPUTS ........................................................................................6-5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................6-6 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................6-6 DIGITAL COUNTERS.........................................................................................6-7 SELECTOR SWITCHES ....................................................................................6-7 FLEX STATES ....................................................................................................6-7 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-7 DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-8 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-8 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-9 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS.............................................................6-9 ETHERNET SWITCH .......................................................................................6-10 METERING CONVENTIONS ...........................................................................6-11 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL.................................................................................6-14 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-14 SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-18 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-18 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE ..................................................................6-19 FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND ACCUMULATION............................................6-19 FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-19 IEC 61580 GOOSE ANALOG VALUES ...........................................................6-20 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-20 STATOR GROUND ..........................................................................................6-21 VOLTS PER HERTZ.........................................................................................6-21 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT......................................................................6-21 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ....................................................................6-21 TRANSDUCER INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................6-22 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS .................................................6-23 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-23 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-23 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-24 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT RECORDS .................................................6-24 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-25 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-25

6.2 STATUS

6.3 METERING

6.4 RECORDS

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1

viii

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 SET DATE AND TIME ....................................................................................... 7-2 RELAY MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 7-2 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT ONE-SHOT.................................................. 7-3 TARGETS MENU............................................................................................... 7-5 TARGET MESSAGES ....................................................................................... 7-5 RELAY SELF-TESTS......................................................................................... 7-5

7.2 TARGETS

8. THEORY OF OPERATION

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

8.1.1 8.1.2 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 8-1 EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................... 8-4

9. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.5 9.1.6 9.1.7 9.1.8 9.1.9 9.1.10 9.1.11 9.1.12 9.1.13 9.1.14 9.1.15 9.1.16 9.2.1 9.2.2 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................... 9-1 SYSTEM SETUP ............................................................................................... 9-1 POWER SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 9-2 SIGNAL SOURCES ........................................................................................... 9-2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL .................................................................................. 9-3 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ............................................................................. 9-3 LOSS OF EXCITATION ..................................................................................... 9-4 REVERSE POWER ........................................................................................... 9-4 SYSTEM BACKUP OVERCURRENT ................................................................ 9-5 BACKUP DISTANCE ......................................................................................... 9-6 STATOR GROUND FAULT ............................................................................... 9-7 OVEREXCITATION ......................................................................................... 9-10 INPUTS/OUTPUTS.......................................................................................... 9-11 FREQUENCY................................................................................................... 9-12 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION ...................................................................... 9-12 FLEXLOGIC ................................................................................................. 9-13 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 9-14 EXAMPLE ........................................................................................................ 9-15

9.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

10. COMMISSIONING

10.1 TESTING
10.1.1 TESTING UNDERFREQUENCY AND OVERFREQUENCY ELEMENTS....... 10-1

A. FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

A.1 PARAMETER LIST

B. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

TABLE OF CONTENTS B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.3.1 B.3.2 B.4.1 B.4.2 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ............................................................... B-7 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-8 DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-62

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

C. IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS

C.1 OVERVIEW
C.1.1 C.1.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.2.4 C.2.5 C.2.6 C.2.7 C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 C.3.4 C.3.5 C.3.6 C.3.7 C.3.8 C.3.9 C.4.1 C.4.2 C.4.3 C.4.4 C.4.5 C.4.6 C.5.1 C.5.2 C.5.3 C.5.4 C.5.5 C.5.6 C.6.1 C.6.2 C.6.3 C.7.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... C-1 COMMUNICATION PROFILES ......................................................................... C-1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-2 GGIO1: DIGITAL STATUS VALUES ................................................................. C-2 GGIO2: DIGITAL CONTROL VALUES.............................................................. C-2 GGIO3: DIGITAL STATUS AND ANALOG VALUES FROM RECEIVED GOOSE DATAC-2 GGIO4: GENERIC ANALOG MEASURED VALUES......................................... C-2 MMXU: ANALOG MEASURED VALUES .......................................................... C-3 PROTECTION AND OTHER LOGICAL NODES............................................... C-3 BUFFERED/UNBUFFERED REPORTING........................................................ C-5 FILE TRANSFER ............................................................................................... C-5 TIMESTAMPS AND SCANNING ....................................................................... C-5 LOGICAL DEVICE NAME ................................................................................. C-5 LOCATION ........................................................................................................ C-5 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES.................................................................. C-6 CONNECTION TIMING ..................................................................................... C-6 NON-IEC 61850 DATA ...................................................................................... C-6 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES..................................................... C-6 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... C-7 GSSE CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. C-7 FIXED GOOSE .................................................................................................. C-7 CONFIGURABLE GOOSE ................................................................................ C-7 ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS FOR GSSE/GOOSE .......................................... C-9 GSSE ID AND GOOSE ID SETTINGS ............................................................ C-10 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... C-11 CONFIGURING IEC 61850 SETTINGS .......................................................... C-12 ABOUT ICD FILES .......................................................................................... C-13 CREATING AN ICD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP.............................. C-17 ABOUT SCD FILES ......................................................................................... C-17 IMPORTING AN SCD FILE WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP........................... C-20 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ................................................ C-22 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ............................................ C-22 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ......................................... C-23 LOGICAL NODES TABLE ............................................................................... C-26

C.2 SERVER DATA ORGANIZATION

C.3 SERVER FEATURES AND CONFIGURATION

C.4 GENERIC SUBSTATION EVENT SERVICES: GSSE AND GOOSE

C.5 IEC 61850 IMPLEMENTATION VIA ENERVISTA UR SETUP

C.6 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.7 LOGICAL NODES

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONS

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104

D.1.1 D.1.2 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT................................................................... D-1 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST ........................................................................... D-9

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
E.1.1 E.1.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS....................................................................................E-8 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT ......................................................E-9 COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-10 ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-11

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

F. MISCELLANEOUS

F.1 CHANGE NOTES

F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2.1 F.3.1 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1 CHANGES TO THE G60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-2 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................... F-6

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY

INDEX

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xii

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

WARNING

CAUTION

Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime. 1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.

G30 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEmultilin.com

RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A 360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Made in Canada

Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:

G30D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A 000 830722A3 GEK-113273 MAZB98000029 D 2005/01/05

830741A1.CDR

Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE) Ensure that the following items are included: Instruction manual GE EnerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format) mounting screws For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEmultilin.com. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE Multilin immediately.
NOTE

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT: GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 TELEPHONE: FAX: E-MAIL: HOME PAGE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only) (905) 201-2098 [email protected] http://www.GEmultilin.com

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems. Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device). It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs. Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly. High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3 milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard. IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.

1-2

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

a) UR BASIC DESIGN The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.

Input Elements
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs CT Inputs VT Inputs Remote Inputs Direct Inputs
Input Status Table

CPU Module
Protective Elements Pickup Dropout Output Operate
Status

Output Elements
Contact Outputs Virtual Outputs Analog Outputs Remote Outputs -DNA -USER Direct Outputs

Logic Gates

Table

LAN Programming Device Operator Interface

827822A2.CDR

Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features. Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay. Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices. b) UR SIGNAL TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry contacts are supported. The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations. The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs. The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages. The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-3

1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION

1 GETTING STARTED

The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.

Read Inputs
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan

Protective Elements

Solve Logic

PKP DPO OP

Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR

Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION 1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with object-oriented design and programming (OOD/OOP) techniques. Object-oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a protection class with the protection elements as objects of the class, such as time overcurrent, instantaneous overcurrent, current differential, undervoltage, overvoltage, underfrequency, and distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for metering, input/output control, hmi, communications, or any functional entity in the system. Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the G60 achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any UR-series device (for example, feeder protection, transformer protection, distance protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications. 1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to elements section in chapter 5. Examples of simple elements, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Control elements section of chapter 5. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC sources section in chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section in chapter 5.

1-4

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

Figure 14: CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9.

MUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS

Enter the relay slave address, COM port, baud rate, and parity settings from the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMmenu in their respective fields.

10. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values. 11. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the G60 section to begin communications. c) CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site. 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use Location 2 as the site name. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click the Device Setup button then select the new site to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.

5. 6. 7.

1-8

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 8.

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

Figure 15: CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 9.

ADDRESS)

Enter the relay IP address specified in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP in the IP Address field.

10. Enter the relay slave address and Modbus port address values from the respective settings in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu. 11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values. 12. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connecting to the G60 section to begin communications. 1.3.4 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE a) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE FRONT PANEL RS232 PORT Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected from the laptop computer to the front panel RS232 port with a straight-through 9-pin to 9-pin RS232 cable. 1. 2. Verify that the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software is installed (available from the GE EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEmultilin.com). See the Software Installation section for installation details. Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-9

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 3. Click the Quick Connect button to open the Quick Connect dialog box.

1 GETTING STARTED

4. 5.

Select the Serial interface and the correct COM Port, then click Connect. The EnerVista UR Setup software will create a site named Quick Connect with a corresponding device also named Quick Connect and display them on the upper-left corner of the screen. Expand the sections to view data directly from the G60 device.

Each time the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to the G60. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the G60 model number. b) USING QUICK CONNECT VIA THE REAR ETHERNET PORTS To use the Quick Connect feature to access the G60 from a laptop through Ethernet, first assign an IP address to the relay from the front panel keyboard. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu is displayed. Navigate to the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting. Enter an IP address of 1.1.1.1 and select the ENTER key to save the value. In the same menu, select the SUBNET IP MASK setting. Enter a subnet IP address of 255.0.0.0 and press the ENTER key to save the value.

Next, use an Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the laptop to the rear Ethernet port. The pinout for an Ethernet crossover cable is shown below.
2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8
END 1 Pin Wire color 1 White/orange 2 Orange 3 White/green 4 Blue 5 White/blue 6 Green 7 White/brown 8 Brown Diagram END 2 Pin Wire color 1 White/green 2 Green 3 White/orange 4 Blue 5 White/blue 6 Orange 7 White/brown 8 Brown Diagram

842799A1.CDR

Figure 16: ETHERNET CROSS-OVER CABLE PIN LAYOUT Now, assign the laptop computer an IP address compatible with the relays IP address.

1-10

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network connections window.

Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.

Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.

Click on the Use the following IP address box.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-11

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 5.

1 GETTING STARTED

Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the G60 relay and the last number different (in this example, 1.1.1.2). Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the G60 (in this example, 255.0.0.0). Click OK to save the values.

6. 7.

Before continuing, it will be necessary to test the Ethernet connection. 1. 2. Open a Windows console window by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing cmd. Type the following command:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1

If the connection is successful, the system will return four replies as follows:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Reply Reply Reply Reply from from from from 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 time<10ms time<10ms time<10ms time<10ms TTL=255 TTL=255 TTL=255 TTL=255

Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms

Note that the values for time and TTL will vary depending on local network configuration.

If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Request Request Request Request timed timed timed timed out. out. out. out.

Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip time in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:

Verify the physical connection between the G60 and the laptop computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2 in the above procedure. If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware error. error. error. error.

1-12

G60 Generator Protection System

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.5 CONNECTING TO THE G60 RELAY

Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:

Quick action hot links

Expand the site list by double-clicking or selecting the +/ box.

Communications status indicators: Green = OK Red = No communications UR icon = report is open

842743A3.CDR

2. 3.

The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier). If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open. Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.

The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Refer to chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.

NOTE

QUICK ACTION HOT LINKS The EnerVista UR Setup software has several new quick action buttons that provide users with instant access to several functions that are often performed when using G60 relays. From the online window, users can select which relay to interrogate from a pull-down window, then click on the button for the action they wish to perform. The following quick action functions are available: View the G60 event record. View the last recorded oscillography record. View the status of all G60 inputs and outputs. View all of the G60 metering values. View the G60 protection summary.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-15

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4UR HARDWARE

1 GETTING STARTED 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully. 1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU communications ports section of chapter 3.

Figure 17: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS To communicate through the G60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the G60 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the G60 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU communications ports section in chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF) as described in the chapter 3. 1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.

1-16

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5USING THE RELAY

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets. The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The decimal key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The HELP key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The ENTER key stores altered setting values. 1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the MENU key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the MENU key advances through the following main heading pages: Actual values. Settings. Commands. Targets. User displays (when enabled). 1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters (), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters (). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE RIGHT key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP 1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state. Select the menu message SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-17

1.5 USING THE RELAY

1 GETTING STARTED

To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press ENTER. The faceplate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING: 1. COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations: change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user-programmable pushbuttons

2. SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values. Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE

1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

1-18

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.7 COMMISSIONING

The G60 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. Since the G60 is a microprocessor-based relay, its characteristics do not change over time. As such, no further functional tests are required. Furthermore, the G60 performs a number of continual self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors (see the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that G60 maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance. In-service maintenance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system). Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications. LED test. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

Out-of-service maintenance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check wiring connections for firmness. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required. Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule). Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust. Event recorder file download with further events analysis. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check.

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption: 1. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.

If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin for prompt service.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

1-19

1.5 USING THE RELAY

1 GETTING STARTED

1-20

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW

The G60 Generator Protection System is a microprocessor based relay that provides protection, monitoring, control, and recording functions for AC generators driven by steam, gas, or hydraulic turbine. Current, voltage and frequency protection are provided along with fault diagnostics. Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor). Diagnostic features include an event recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and data logger acquisition of up to 16 channels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIGB signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault. A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10Base-F Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10Base-F fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/ TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (G60 web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time. The G60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single line diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers. Table 21: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE NUMBER 21P 24 25 27P 27TN 27X 32 40 46 50G 50N 50P 50SP 50/27 51G 51P FUNCTION Phase Distance Backup Volts Per Hertz Synchrocheck Phase Undervoltage Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Auxiliary Undervoltage Sensitive Directional Power Loss of Excitation Generator Unbalance Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Split Phase Protection Accidental Energization Ground Time Overcurrent Phase Time Overcurrent DEVICE NUMBER 59N 59P 59X 59_2 64TN 67_2 67N 67P 68/78 81A 81O 81R 81U 87G 87S FUNCTION Neutral Overvoltage Phase Overvoltage Auxiliary Overvoltage Negative Sequence Overvoltage 100% Stator Ground Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent Neutral Directional Overcurrent Phase Directional Overcurrent Power Swing Detection Frequency Out-Of-Band Accumulation Overfrequency Rate of Change of Frequency Underfrequency Restricted Ground Fault Stator Differential

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-1

2.1 INTRODUCTION

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

CLOSE TRIP
24 27P 59P 59_2 59N 81O 81U 81R 25

50/27 21P

50P

50N

51P

51N

67P

67_2

67N

87S

Metering

87G

50G

51G
27TN 27Aux 59Aux

64TN

G60 Generator Management Relay

830710A9.CDR

Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION Breaker control Contact inputs (up to 96) Contact outputs (up to 96) Control pushbuttons Data logger Digital counters (8) Digital elements (48) Direct inputs and outputs (32) Disconnect switches DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 protocol Ethernet Global Data protocol (optional) Event recorder FlexLogic equations FUNCTION FlexElements (16) Generator unbalance IEC 61850 communications (optional) Metering: current, voltage, power, frequency Oscillography Modbus communications Modbus user map Non-volatile latches Non-volatile selector switch RTD protection Setting groups (6) Stator differential FUNCTION Synchrophasors Time synchronization over SNTP Transducer inputs and outputs Trip output User-definable displays User-programmable fault reports User-programmable LEDs User-programmable pushbuttons User-programmable self-tests Virtual inputs (64) Virtual outputs (96) VT fuse failure

2.1.2 ORDERING The G60 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or a reduced size () vertical mount unit, and consists of the following modules: CPU, faceplate, power supply, CPU, CTs and VTs, digital input and outputs, transducer inputs and outputs, and inter-relay communications. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see chapter 3 for additional details of relay modules).

2-2

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Order codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning G60 ordering options.
NOTE

The order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below. Table 23: G60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M N P R S ** | | | | | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H A * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C D R A P G S B K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H H L L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - P ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - U ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H | | 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W W/X ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | RH | RL | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Full Size Horizontal Mount Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Horizontal (19 rack) Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 8 dcmA inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC) Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC) 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels

SOFTWARE

MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply must be same type as main supply) CT/VT MODULES

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS (select a maximum of 3 per unit) INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-3

2.1 INTRODUCTION The order codes for the reduced size vertical mount units are shown below. Table 24: G60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)
BASE UNIT CPU G60 G60 * | E G H J K L M N P R ** | | | | | | | | | | | 00 01 03 04 06 07 - * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | V B * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C D R A K M Q U L N T V * - F | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H L ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R - H ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F - M ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F P/R ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SOFTWARE

MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY CT/VT MODULES

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay communications modules.

Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below) Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Phasor measurement unit (PMU) IEC 61850 and phasor measurement unit (PMU) Vertical (3/4 rack) Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display French display Russian display Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 8 dcmA inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels

2.1.3 REPLACEMENT MODULES Replacement modules can be ordered separately as shown below. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit. Not all replacement modules may be applicable to the G60 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as replacement modules.
NOTE

2-4

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Replacement module codes are subject to change without notice. Refer to the GE Multilin ordering page at http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/order.htm for the latest details concerning G60 ordering options.
NOTE

The replacement module order codes for the horizontal mount units are shown below. Table 25: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, HORIZONTAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply only available in horizontal units; must be same type as main supply) CPU UR | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ** 1H 1L RH RH 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 9S 3C 3D 3R 3A 3P 3G 3S 3B 3K 3M 3Q 3U 3L 3N 3T 3V 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and six-port managed Ethernet switch Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply (110 to 250 V DC / 100 to 240 V AC) Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply (48 V DC) 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs 8 dcmA inputs

FACEPLATE/DISPLAY

DIGITAL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

CT/VT MODULES (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-5

2.1 INTRODUCTION

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The replacement module order codes for the reduced-size vertical mount units are shown below. Table 26: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES, VERTICAL UNITS
POWER SUPPLY CPU UR | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ** 1H 1L 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 3F 3D 3R 3K 3K 3M 3Q 3U 3L 3N 3T 3V 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 8F 8G 8H 8J 8L 8M 8N 8R 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display Enhanced front panel with French display Enhanced front panel with Russian display Enhanced front panel with Chinese display Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs 8 dcmA inputs

2
FACEPLATE/DISPLAY

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CT/VT MODULES (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30)

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

2-6

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT
mho (memory polarized or offset) or quad (memory polarized or non-directional), selectable individually per zone 3 forward, reverse, or non-directional per zone 0.02 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Pickup: Dropout: Slope: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Operate time: Current: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0 CT: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 30 to 90 in steps of 1 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 60 to 90 in steps of 1 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 60 to 90 in steps of 1 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater line-to-line current 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers Reset type: Timing accuracy: Curve multiplier: for > 2.0 CT: Curve shapes: 0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Operate at > 1.03 actual pickup 3.5% of operate time or cycle (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 0.4% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading <2% 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC) <20 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC) Operate at 1.5 pickup 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0 to 100% in steps of 1% 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <1 power system cycle Phasor or RMS 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97% to 98% of pickup

NOTE

PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic:

Number of zones: Directionality: Reach (secondary ): Reach accuracy: Distance: Characteristic angle: Directional supervision: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Reach: Characteristic angle: Left Blinder (Quad only): Reach: Characteristic angle: Time delay: Timing accuracy: Current supervision: Level: Pickup: Dropout: Memory duration: VT location: CT location:

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC

Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

Right blinder (Quad only):

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating Overreach: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Operate time:

Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications): 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Operation time: Reset time: Pickup: Slope 1 and 2: Break 1: Break 2: Operate time: 1 to 1.5 cycles (typical) 1 power cycle (typical) 0.050 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01 1 to 100% in steps of 1 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 < cycle at Idiff > 5 pickup

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

Timing accuracy:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-7

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Relay connection: Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB) ACB phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA) 90 (quadrature)

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION GENERATOR UNBALANCE

Gen. nominal current: Stages: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2 x CT rating: > 2.0 x CT rating: Time dial (K-value): Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Measured power: Number of stages: Characteristic angle: Calibration angle: Minimum power: Pickup level accuracy: Hysteresis: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy: 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 50 ms at 60 Hz split phase CT current biased by generator load current 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 5 cycles, whichever is greater < 5 cycles at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 3-phase, true RMS 2 0 to 359 in steps of 1 0.00 to 0.95 in steps of 0.05 1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 1% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater 50 ms 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse; Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Operate at < 0.90 pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 2 (I2t with linear reset and definite time) 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% of pickup

Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu Characteristic angle: Angle accuracy: 0 to 359 in steps of 1 2

Operation time (FlexLogic operands): Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< 12 ms, typically Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):< 8 ms, typically

SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT

Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Polarizing current: Operating current: Level sensing: Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Operating current: Level sensing: Zero-sequence:|I_0| K |I_1| Negative-sequence:|I_2| K |I_1| Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 0 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.015 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage, Current, Dual V_0 or VX IG I_0 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|), IG 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 90 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage V_2 I_2

SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy:

2-8

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE

Operating quantity: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Power: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Undervoltage Inhibit Level: Accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz Phasor only 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite time) or user-defined curve 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz df/dt trend: df/dt pickup level: df/dt dropout level: df/dt level accuracy: Overvoltage supv.: Overcurrent supv.: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: 0.000 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 5% or 0.01 pu, whichever is greater TD Multiplier: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 3rd harmonic of auxiliary undervoltage

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS VOLTS PER HERTZ

Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Timing curves: Phasor only 0.80 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 pu V/Hz 97 to 98% of pickup 0.02 pu Definite Time; Inverse A, B, and C, FlexCurves A, B, C, and D 0.05 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 15 cycles (whichever is greater) for values greater than 1.1 pickup V _neutral_3rd --------------------------------------------------------------------------V _neutral_3rd + V _zero_3rd 0.000 to 0.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

100% STATOR GROUND

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE

3rd harmonic supervision level: 0.0010 to 0.1000 pu in steps of 0.0001 Time accuracy: Operate time: 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 pickup + 0.03 Hz 0.001 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 pickup 0.03 Hz 0.001 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater typically 4 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change typically 3.5 cycles at 0.3 Hz/s change typically 3 cycles at 0.5 Hz/s change increasing, decreasing, bi-directional 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 96% of pickup 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater 12 cycles at 2 pickup 8 cycles at 3 pickup 5 cycles at 5 pickup

UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum signal: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy: Operate time:

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE

OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy: Operate time:

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE

RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE

95% settling time for df/dt: < 24 cycles

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-9

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS TURBINE FREQUENCY OUT-OF-BAND (OOB) ACCUMULATED OPERATING TIME

Frequency OOB accumulation: 7 sets; 20 to 70 Hz in steps of 0.01 Frequency OOB accumulation pickup: 1 to 65536 s in steps of 1 Frequency OOB accumulator preset: 1 to 65536 s in steps of 1 Level accuracy: 0.01 Hz Minimum volt/amp supervision: 0.1 to 1.25 pu of V_1 or I_1

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION

Operating condition: Arming condition: Overcurrent: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Operate Time: Operating condition: Characteristic: Center: Radius: Reach accuracy: Level: Accuracy: Pickup delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading 10 to 208 V < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz Positive-sequence impedance 2 independent offset mho circles 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 3% 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater <50 ms 1 to 249C in steps of 1 2C of pickup <1 s trip and alarm 6 16 <2 ms at 60 Hz 3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating Overcurrent Undervoltage and/or Machine Offline

Timing accuracy of accumulation: 1% or 1 second, whichever is greater

SYNCHROCHECK
Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1 Max angle difference: Max freq. difference: Dead source function: 0 to 100 in steps of 1 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L = Live, D = Dead) Power swing block, Out-of-step trip Mho or Quad Positive-sequence Early or Delayed 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup

Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01

LOSS OF EXCITATION

POWER SWING DETECT

Functions: Characteristic: Measured impedance: Tripping mode: Current supervision: Pickup level: Dropout level:

Undervoltage supervision

Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step

Fwd / reverse reach (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Left and right blinders (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Impedance accuracy: Angle accuracy: Timers: Timing accuracy: 5% 2 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90 in steps of 1 Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

RTD PROTECTION
Pickup: Dropout level: Timing accuracy: Elements: Number of elements: Number of inputs: Operate time: Time accuracy:

TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)

2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS FLEXLOGIC

Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable) Lines of code: Internal variables: Supported operations: 512 64 NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 32 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1

FLEXCURVES
Number: Reset points: Operate points: Time delay: 4 (A through D) 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) 80 (1 through 20 of pickup) 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input

FLEX STATES
Number: Programmability:

Inputs: Number of timers: Pickup delay: Dropout delay:

2-10

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FLEXELEMENTS

Number of elements: Operating signal: 16 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode level, delta over, under 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 20 ms to 60 days

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

Number of displays: Lines of display: Parameters: Invoking and scrolling: 16 2 20 alphanumeric characters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons

Operating signal mode: signed or absolute value Operating mode: Comparator direction: Pickup Level: Hysteresis: Delta dt:

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7 Operation: drive FlexLogic operands

Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)

Number of pushbuttons: 12 (standard faceplate); 16 (enhanced faceplate) Mode: Display message: Drop-out timer: Autoreset timer: Hold timer: self-reset, latched 2 lines of 20 characters each 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1 2 1 to 7 in steps of 1 time-out or acknowledge 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/ restore mode 48 any FlexLogic operand 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Number: Output: Execution sequence: set-dominant or reset-dominant 16 (individually programmed) stored in non-volatile memory as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic 48 plus trip and alarm from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input self-reset or latched from any digital input or user-programmable condition 3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: Programmability: Reset mode:

SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements: Upper position limit: Selecting mode: Time-out timer: Control inputs: Power-up mode:

LED TEST
Initiation: Number of tests: Duration of full test: Test sequence 1: Test sequence 2: Test sequence 3:

DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements: Operating signal: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Timing accuracy:

2.2.3 MONITORING OSCILLOGRAPHY

Maximum records: Sampling rate: Triggers: 64 64 samples per power cycle any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; FlexLogic equation AC input channels; element state; digital input state; digital output state in non-volatile memory 1024 events to 1 microsecond any element pickup, dropout, or operate; digital input change of state; digital output change of state; self-test events in non-volatile memory

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

Number of elements: Pre-fault trigger: Fault trigger: Recorder quantities: 2 any FlexLogic operand any FlexLogic operand 32 (any FlexAnalog value) 1 to 16 any available analog actual value 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 any FlexLogic operand continuous or triggered (NN is dependent on memory) 1-second rate: 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days 60-minute rate: 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days

DATA LOGGER
Number of channels: Parameters: Sampling rate: Trigger: Mode: Storage capacity:

Data: Data storage:

EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers:

Data storage:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-11

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

Output format: Number of channels: TVE (total vector error) Triggering: per IEEE C37.118 standard 14 synchrophasors, 8 analogs, 16 digitals <1% frequency, voltage, current, power, rate of change of frequency, user-defined 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second One over TCP/IP port, two over UDP/IP ports As indicated in appropriate specifications sections

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Reporting rate: Number of clients: AC ranges:

Network reporting format: 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers Network reporting style: rectangular (real and imaginary) or polar (magnitude and angle) coordinates Post-filtering: Calibration: none, 3-point, 5-point, 7-point 5

2.2.4 METERING RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND

Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.0% of reading 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 1.0% of reading at 0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0 1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2 1.0% of reading I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: I > 0.25 pu:

WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: 2.0% of reading 0 to 1 106 MWh three-phase only 50 ms 2.0% of reading 0 to 1 106 Mvarh three-phase only 50 ms

RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: Accuracy:

VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

REAL POWER (WATTS)

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: Accuracy:

FREQUENCY
Accuracy at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: 0.001 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement) 0.05 Hz 0.001 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)

APPARENT POWER (VA)

2.2.5 INPUTS AC CURRENT

CT rated primary: CT rated secondary: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: 1 to 50000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 65 Hz < 0.2 VA at rated secondary

AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: VT ratio: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Voltage withstand: 50.0 to 240.0 V 1.00 to 24000.00 20 to 65 Hz < 0.25 VA at 120 V 1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral

Conversion range: Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical Sensitive Ground CT module: 0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated 1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated 150000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (primary current to external CT)

Short circuit rating:

2-12

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION CONTACT INPUTS

Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS IRIG-B INPUT

Amplitude modulation: DC shift: Input impedance: Isolation: 1 to 10 V pk-pk TTL 22 k 2 kV

Contacts per common return: 4

REMOTE INPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs Number of remote devices: 16 Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)

CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING

Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

DIRECT INPUTS
Number of input points: 32 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 16 Yes, No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

Contacts per common return: 2

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized) Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms

CRC alarm: Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 Unreturned message alarm: Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): Input impedance: Conversion range: Accuracy: Type: 0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) 379 10% 1 to + 20 mA DC 0.2% of full scale Passive 100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10 Copper 5 mA 50 to +250C 2C 36 V pk-pk

TELEPROTECTION
Number of input points: 16 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 3 No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): Sensing current: Range: Accuracy: Isolation:

2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY LOW RANGE

Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 24 to 48 V 20 / 60 V 20 ms duration at nominal

ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: Power consumption: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms typical = 15 to 20 W/VA maximum = 50 W/VA contact factory for exact order code consumption

NOTE: Low range is DC only.

HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Nominal AC voltage: Min/max AC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 125 to 250 V 88 / 300 V 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz 88 / 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz 200 ms duration at nominal

INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS

Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V

INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: DC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical 10 000 A

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-13

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.7 OUTPUTS

FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: 6A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY

Operate and release time: <100 s Maximum voltage: Make and carry: for 0.2 s: for 0.03 s Breaking capacity:
UL508 Utility application (autoreclose scheme) 5 ops / 0.2 s-On, 0.2 s-Off within 1 minute Industrial application

265 V DC

Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 300 A

VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V

Operate time: Contact material:

< 4 ms silver alloy

Operations/ interval 5000 ops / 1 s-On, 9 s-Off 1000 ops / 0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off Break capability (0 to 250 V DC) 3.2 A L/R = 10 ms 1.6 A L/R = 20 ms 0.8 A L/R = 40 ms

LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: Control: Control mode: Applicable voltage: Trickle current: Threshold current: 6A 0.25 A DC max. < 4 ms silver alloy separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant

10000 ops / 0.2 s-On, 30 s-Off

10 A L/R = 40 ms

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

approx. 15 to 250 V DC approx. 1 to 2.5 mA approx. 80 to 100 mA

IRIG-B OUTPUT
Amplitude: Maximum load: Time delay: Isolation: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level 100 ohms 1 ms for AM input 40 s for DC-shift input 2 kV

FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY

Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous:
VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V

8A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)

Capacity: Isolation: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC 300 Vpk

Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard output points: 32 User output points: 32 32 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA 12 k for 1 to 1 mA range 12 k for 0 to 1 mA range 600 for 4 to 20 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range 0.5% of full-scale for 1 to 1 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range 1.5 kV any FlexAnalog quantity

DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points:

Operate time: Contact material: Make and carry:

INPUT VOLTAGE 250 V DC 120 V DC 48 V DC 24 V DC

< 8 ms silver alloy 0.1 A max. (resistive load)

IMPEDANCE 2 W RESISTOR 20 K 5 K 2 K 2 K 1 W RESISTOR 50 K 2 K 2 K 2 K

DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: Max. load resistance:

FAST FORM-C RELAY

Minimum load impedance:

Accuracy:

99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms Isolation: Driving signal:

Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.

Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001

Operate time:

< 0.6 ms

Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W

2-14

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ETHERNET SWITCH (HIGH VOLTAGE, TYPE 2S)

Nominal DC voltage: Minimum DC voltage: Maximum DC voltage: Input Current: Nominal AC voltage: Minimum AC voltage: Maximum AC voltage: Internal fuse: 110 to 240 V DC 88 V DC 300 V DC 0.9 A DC maximum 100 to 240 V AC, 0.26 to 0.16 A/26 to 39 VA at 50/60 Hz 85 V AC, 0.31 A/22 VA at 50/60 Hz 265 V AC, 0.16 A/42 VA at 50/60 Hz 3 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO BLO; Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number: SCD-A 003

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH (LOW VOLTAGE, TYPE 2T)

Nominal voltage: Minimum voltage: Maximum voltage: Internal fuse: 48 V DC, 0.31 A/15 W 30 V DC, 0.43 A/16 W 60 V DC 5 A / 350 V AC, Ceramic, Axial SLO BLO; Manufacturer: Conquer; Part number: SCD-A 005

2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS RS232

Front port: 19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk 1200 m 2 kV

ETHERNET SWITCH FIBER OPTIC PORTS

Maximum fiber segment length calculation: The maximum fiber segment length between two adjacent switches or between a switch and a device is calculated as follows. First, calculate the optical power budget (OPB) of each device using the manufacturers data sheets. OPB = P T ( MIN ) P R ( MIN ) where OPB = optical power budget, PT = transmitter output power, and PR = receiver sensitivity.
FIBER TYPE 10MB MULTIMODE 100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLEMODE MODE1 1310 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 14 dBm 2 km full/half yes 1310 nm SC 15 dBm 30 dBm 15 dB 7 dBm 15 km full/half yes

RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Typical distance: Isolation:

ETHERNET (FIBER)
PARAMETER

Wavelength Connector Transmit power Receiver sensitivity Power budget Maximum input power Typical distance Duplex Redundancy

820 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 7.6 dBm 1.65 km full/half yes

The worst case optical power budget (OPBWORST) is then calculated by taking the lower of the two calculated power budgets, subtracting 1 dB for LED aging, and then subtracting the total insertion loss. The total insertion loss is calculated by multiplying the number of connectors in each single fiber path by 0.5 dB. For example, with a single fiber cable between the two devices, there will be a minimum of two connections in either transmit or receive fiber paths for a total insertion loss of 1db for either direction: Total insertion loss = number of connectors 0.5 dB = 2 0.5 dB = 1.0 dB The worst-case optical power budget between two type 2T or 2S modules using a single fiber cable is: OPB WORST = OPB 1 dB (LED aging) total insertion loss 10 dB 1 dB 1 dB = 8 dB To calculate the maximum fiber length, divide the worst-case optical power budget by the cable attenuation per unit distance specified in the manufacturer data sheets. For example, typical attenuation for 62.5/125 m glass fiber optic cable is approximately 2.8 dB per km. In our example, this would result in the following maximum fiber length: OPB WORST (in dB) Maximum fiber length = -----------------------------------------------------cable loss (in dB/km) 8 dB = -------------------------- = 2.8 km 2.8 dB/km The customer must use the attenuation specified within the manufacturer data sheets for accurate calculation of the maximum fiber length.

1. UR-2S and UR-2T only support 100 Mb multimode

ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)

Modes: Connector: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect) RJ45

SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)

ETHERNET SWITCH 10/100BASE-T PORTS

Connector type: RJ45 MAXIMUM 10 MBPS ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS Unshielded twisted pair: 100 m (328 ft.) Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)

MAXIMUM STANDARD FAST ETHERNET SEGMENT LENGTHS 10Base-T (CAT 3, 4, 5 UTP): 100 m (328 ft.) 100Base-TX (CAT 5 UTP):100 m (328 ft.) Shielded twisted pair: 150 m (492 ft.)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-15

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS

INTERFACE TYPE RS422 G.703 TYPICAL DISTANCE 1200 m 100 m

TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE

EMITTER TYPE 820 nm LED, multimode 1300 nm LED, multimode 1300 nm ELED, single mode 1300 nm Laser, single mode 1550 nm Laser, single-mode CABLE TYPE 62.5/125 m 62.5/125 m 9/125 m 9/125 m 9/125 m CONNECTOR TYPE ST ST ST ST ST TYPICAL DISTANCE 1.65 km 3.8 km 11.4 km 64 km 105 km

2
NOTE

RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.

LINK POWER BUDGET

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode TRANSMIT POWER 20 dBm 21 dBm 23 dBm 1 dBm +5 dBm RECEIVED SENSITIVITY 30 dBm 30 dBm 32 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm POWER BUDGET 10 dB 9 dB 9 dB 29 dB 35 dB

NOTE

Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
2 dB 3 dB/km 1 dB/km 0.35 dB/km 0.25 dB/km One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.

CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)

ST connector

NOTE

These power budgets are calculated from the manufacturers worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity. The power budgets for the 1300nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values will deviate based on component tolerance. On average, the output power will decrease as the temperature is increased by a factor 1dB / 5C.

FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 1300 nm multimode 1300 nm singlemode 1550 nm singlemode Splice losses:

NOTE

SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses. Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms

MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER

EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode MAX. OPTICAL INPUT POWER 7.6 dBm 11 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm

2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURES

Storage temperature: 40 to 85C Operating temperature: 40 to 60C; the LCD contrast may be impaired at temperatures less than 20C

OTHER
Altitude: Pollution degree: Overvoltage category: Ingress protection: 2000 m (maximum) II II IP40 front, IP20 back

HUMIDITY
Humidity: operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55C (as per IEC60068-2-30 variant 1, 6days).

2-16

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.11 TYPE TESTS

TYPE TESTS
TEST Dielectric voltage withstand Impulse voltage withstand Damped oscillatory Electrostatic discharge RF immunity Fast transient disturbance Surge immunity Conducted RF immunity Power frequency immunity Voltage interruption and ripple DC Radiated and conducted emissions Sinusoidal vibration Shock and bump Seismic Power magnetic immunity Pulse magnetic immunity Damped magnetic immunity Voltage dip and interruption Damped oscillatory Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz Voltage ripple Ingress protection Cold Hot Humidity Damped oscillatory RF immunity Safety Safety Safety REFERENCE STANDARD EN60255-5 EN60255-5 IEC61000-4-18 / IEC60255-22-1 EN61000-4-2 / IEC60255-22-2 EN61000-4-3 / IEC60255-22-3 EN61000-4-4 / IEC60255-22-4 EN61000-4-5 / IEC60255-22-5 EN61000-4-6 / IEC60255-22-6 EN61000-4-7 / IEC60255-22-7 IEC60255-11 CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC60255-25 IEC60255-21-1 IEC60255-21-2 IEC60255-21-3 IEC61000-4-8 IEC61000-4-9 IEC61000-4-10 IEC61000-4-11 IEC61000-4-12 IEC61000-4-16 IEC61000-4-17 IEC60529 IEC60068-2-1 IEC60068-2-2 IEC60068-2-30 IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1 IEEE/ANSIC37.90.2 UL508 UL C22.2-14 UL1053 TEST LEVEL 2.3 kV 5 kV 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 3 Level 3 Class A and B Level 3 and 4 Level 3 Class A and B 12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts Class A Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Level 5 Level 4 Level 4 0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts 2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM Level 4 15% ripple IP40 front, IP10 back 40C for 16 hours 85C for 16 hours 6 day, variant 1 2.5 kV, 1 MHz 20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz e83849 NKCR e83849 NKCR7 e83849 NKCR

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

2-17

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS

THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

2.2.13 APPROVALS

APPROVALS
COMPLIANCE CE compliance APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE Low voltage directive EMC directive North America ------ACCORDING TO EN60255-5 EN60255-26 / EN50263 EN61000-6-5 UL508 UL1053 C22.2 No. 14

2.2.14 MAINTENANCE MOUNTING

Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds) of torque.

CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used. Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.

NOTE

2-18

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION a) HORIZONTAL UNITS

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT

The G60 Generator Protection System is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable faceplate. The faceplate can be specified as either standard or enhanced at the time of ordering. The enhanced faceplate contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons and LED indicators. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.

11.016 [279,81 mm] 9.687 [246,05 mm]

17.56 [446,02 mm]

7.460 [189,48 mm] 6.995 [177,67 mm] 6.960 [176,78 mm]

19.040 [483,62 mm]

842807A1.CDR

Figure 31: G60 HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS (ENHANCED PANEL)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-1

3.1 DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE

18.370 [466,60 mm] 0.280 [7,11 mm] Typ. x 4 CUT-OUT

4.000 [101,60 mm]

17.750 [450,85 mm]

842808A1.CDR

Figure 32: G60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING (ENHANCED PANEL)

Figure 33: G60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS (STANDARD PANEL) b) VERTICAL UNITS The G60 Generator Protection System is available as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.

3-2

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.1 DESCRIPTION

UR SERIES

Figure 34: G60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

P
c

N
b

M
a

K
c

J
b a

H
c

G
b a

b
Tx1

a 1 2
CH1

b 1 2
Tx1

a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

Rx1

3
Tx1

3 4
CH1 Tx Rx CH2

3 4 5 6

Rx1

Tx2

Rx2

Tx2

7 8

Tx2

OUT

Rx2

Optional Ethernet switch

Optional direct input/output module

Optional Optional contact CT/VT or input/output contact module input/output module

Optional contact input/output module

CT/VT module

CPU module (Ethernet not available when ordered with Ethernet switch)

CH2

Power supply module

830720A3.CDR

Figure 39: REAR TERMINAL VIEW Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING

The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-7

3.1 DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE

3
Figure 310: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS

3-8

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.2WIRING

3.2 WIRING 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING

TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
POSITIVE WATTS

OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION (ABC)

A B C

3
F 6a F 5a F 7a F 6c

M1a

M2a

M1b

M2b

M3a

M3b

M4a

M4b

M1c

M2c

M3c

M4c

F 7c

F 5c

F6a

F5a

F7a

F8a

F4a

F1a

F1b

F2a

F2b

F3a

F3b

F5c

F6c

F7c

F3c

F1c

F4b
IG

F8c

F2c

IG5

IG1

IC5

IC1

IB5

IB1

IC1

IB5

IA5

IA1

IB1

IG1

IA5

IA1

F4c

CURRENT INPUTS 8F/8G or 8H/8J

VOLTAGE INPUTS

VOLTAGE INPUTS 8F / 8G

CURRENT INPUTS

VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SUPERVISION

TC 2

V I

H7a H7c H8a H8c H7b

H8b
( DC ONLY )

CONTACT INPUT H7a CONTACT INPUT H7c CONTACT INPUT H8a CONTACT INPUT H8c COMMON H7b SURGE

V I

AC or DC

CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER

POWER SUPPLY

B1b B1a B2b B3a B3b B5b HI B6b LO B6a B8a B8b

CRITICAL FAILURE 48 V DC OUTPUT

GE Consumer & Industrial Multilin

G60 GENERATOR MANAGEMENT RELAY

RS-232 (front) DB-9

CPU

IRIG-B Output

RS485 COM 1

RS485 COM 2

IRIG-B Input

CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER

com

BNC

D1b D2b D3b D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

BNC

No. 10AWG minimum

MODULE ARRANGEMENT

X
GROUND BUS

N
8

M
CT

J
6

G
8

D
9 CPU

B
1 Power Supply
25 PIN CONNECTOR

Inputs/ VT/CT outputs (Rear View)

Shielded twisted pairs

Co-axial *

Co-axial

Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input only use one terminal as input

COMPUTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

Ground at Remote Device

This diagram is based on the following order code: G60-H00-HCH-F8F-H6G-M8H-PXX-UXX-WXX This diagram provides an example of how the device is wired, not specifically how to wire the device. Please refer to the Instruction Manual for additional details on wiring based on various configurations.

SGND

TXD RXD

MODULES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED

830721A4.CDR

Figure 311: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

9 PIN CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

VOLTAGE SUPERVISION

H5a H5c H6a H6c H5b

CONTACT INPUT H5a CONTACT INPUT H5c CONTACT INPUT H6a CONTACT INPUT H6c COMMON H5b

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

6G H1
V

H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c

TC 1

3-9

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE 3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table: Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE TYPE 1 1 1 2 3 MODULE FUNCTION FROM Power supply Power supply Power supply Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog inputs/outputs Digital inputs/outputs G.703 RS422 CT/VT CPU High (+); Low (+); () 48 V DC (+) and () Relay terminals N/A N/A N/A All except 8b All All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a All except 6a, 7b, 8a All All TERMINALS TO Chassis Chassis Chassis N/A N/A N/A Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis DIELECTRIC STRENGTH (AC) 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute N/A N/A N/A < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute

4 5 6 7 8 9

Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute. 3.2.3 CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! The G60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

CAUTION

NOTE

The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical specifications section of chapter 2 for additional details): Low (LO) range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal. High (HI) range: 125 to 250 V nominal.

The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections. The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the Typical wiring diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-test errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize. For high reliability systems, the G60 has a redundant option in which two G60 power supplies are placed in parallel on the bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply.

3-10

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION CONTINUOUS ON ON / OFF CYCLING OFF POWER SUPPLY OK Failure Failure

3.2 WIRING

AC or DC

NOTE: 14 gauge stranded wire with suitable disconnect devices is recommended.

AC or DC

Heavy copper conductor or braided wire

3
GND
B8b B8a B6a B6b B5b
FILTER SURGE

LOW

HIGH

CONTROL POWER

OPTIONAL ETHERNET SWITCH

Switchgear ground bus

UR-series protection system

827759AA.CDR

Figure 312: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION 3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Likewise, channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to phase B, and channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to phase C. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single-phase source. For voltage inputs, these channel are labelled as auxiliary voltage (VX). For current inputs, these channels are intended for connection to a CT between system neutral and ground, and are labelled as ground current (IG). Verify that the connection made to the relay nominal current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
CAUTION

CT/VT modules may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current input. Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used. CT/VT modules with a sensitive ground input are also available. The ground CT input of the sensitive ground modules is ten times more sensitive than the ground CT input of standard CT/VT modules. However, the phase CT inputs and phase VT inputs are the same as those of regular CT/VT modules. The above modules are available with enhanced diagnostics. These modules can automatically detect CT/VT hardware failure and take the relay out of service. CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical wiring diagram. The exact placement of a zero-sequence core balance CT to detect ground fault current is shown below. Twisted-pair cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-11

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

UNSHIELDED CABLE
Source B C
Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side

SHIELDED CABLE
Source
A B C

G
Ground outside CT

Stress cone shields

3
LOAD
To ground; must be on load side

LOAD

996630A5

Figure 313: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the synchrocheck and volts-per-hertz features. Substitute the tilde ~ symbol with the slot position of the module in the following figure.
NOTE

~ 1a

~ 1b

~ 2a

~ 2b

~ 3a

~ 3b

~ 4a

~ 4b

~ 5a

~ 6a

~ 7a

~ 8a
VX

~ 1c

~ 2c

~ 3c

~ 4c

~ 5c

~ 6c

~ 7c

IG5

IG1

IA1

IC1

IB1

IA5

Current inputs Voltage inputs 8F, 8G, 8L, and 8M modules (4 CTs and 4 VTs)

~ 1a

~ 1b

~ 2a

~ 2b

~ 3a

~ 3b

IC5

IB5

~ 4a

~ 4b

~ 5a

~ 5b

~ 6a

~ 6b

~ 7a

~ 7b

~ 8a

~ 8c ~ 8b
IG

~ 1c

~ 2c

~ 3c

~ 4c

~ 5c

~ 6c

~ 7c

IG1

IG5

Current inputs 8H, 8J, 8N, and 8R modules (8 CTs)

842766A3.CDR

Figure 314: CT/VT MODULE WIRING

3-12

G60 Generator Protection System

IG5

IA5

IC5

IB5

IG1

IA1

IC1

IB1

~ 8c

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING 3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. The digital inputs are grouped with a common return. The G60 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return. When a digital input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module). The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position. Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. Block diagrams are shown below for form-A and form-A / solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional current monitor, and with no monitoring
If Idc 80mA, Cont Op xxx Ion otherwise Cont Op xxx Ioff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op xxx Von otherwise Cont Op xxx Voff ~#b V ~#c Load

~#a I ~#b V ~#c If Idc 1mA, Cont Op xxx Von otherwise Cont Op xxx Voff + Load I

~#a

a) Voltage with optional current monitoring

Voltage monitoring only

Both voltage and current monitoring

~#a V ~#b I ~#c If Idc 80mA, Cont Op xxx Ion otherwise Cont Op xxx Ioff + Load I V

~#a

If Idc 80mA, Cont Op xxx Ion otherwise Cont Op xxx Ioff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op xxx Von otherwise Cont Op xxx Voff

~#b

Load

b) Current with optional voltage monitoring

~#c

Current monitoring only

Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required)

~#a

~#b

+ Load

c) No monitoring

~#c

827821A6.CDR

Figure 315: FORM-A CONTACT FUNCTIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-13

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

~#a I ~#b V ~#c If Idc 1mA, Cont Op ## Von otherwise Cont Op ## Voff I

~#a

If Idc 80mA, Cont Op ## Ion otherwise Cont Op ## Ioff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op ## Von otherwise Cont Op ## Voff

Load

Load V

~#b

~#c

a) Voltage with optional current monitoring

Voltage monitoring only

Both voltage and current monitoring

~#a V V I ~#b If Idc 80mA, Cont Op ## Ion otherwise Cont Op ## Ioff

~#a

If Idc 80mA, Cont Op ## Ion otherwise Cont Op ## Ioff If Idc 1mA, Cont Op ## Von otherwise Cont Op ## Voff

Load

3
b) Current with optional voltage monitoring

Load

~#b

~#c

Current monitoring only

Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required)

827862A2.CDR

~#a

~#b

Load

c) No monitoring

~#c

Figure 316: FORM-A AND SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON, CONT OP # VOFF, CONT OP # ION, and CONT OP # IOFF) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command. Refer to the Digital elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring. Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels! USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE

WARNING

For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance. The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the formA contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number

NOTE

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).

3-14

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

Table 32: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS

~6A MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6B MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C ~6D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6E MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6F MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C

~6G MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6H MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6K MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C

~6L MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6M MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6N MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6P MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6R MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6S MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6T MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-15

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

~6U MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~67 MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A

~4A MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State

~4B MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State

3
~4C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State ~4D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs Not Used

3-16

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

842762A2.CDR

Figure 317: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-17

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

Figure 318: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2) CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION

3-18

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE CONTACT INPUTS:

3.2 WIRING

A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 7b COMMON ~ 8b SURGE 6B ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 8b SURGE

24-250V

B 1b CRITICAL B 1a FAILURE B 2b B 3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B 3b + B 5b HI+ CONTROL B 6b LO+ POWER B 6a B 8a SURGE B 8b FILTER

POWER SUPPLY

827741A4.CDR

Figure 319: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE

Contact outputs may be ordered as form-a or form-C. The form-A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts. There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-19

3.2 WIRING USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:

3 HARDWARE

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this. The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current 50 to 70 mA

3
3 mA time 25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR

Figure 320: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over. Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Digital Input/ Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs. The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

842751A1.CDR

Figure 321: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE

3-20

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING 3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs. Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number. Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module.
NOTE

Figure 322: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-21

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE 3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT

A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the G60 faceplate for programming with a personal computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9-pin and 25-pin connectors. The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE

Figure 323: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS a) OPTIONS In addition to the faceplate RS232 port, the G60 provides two additional communication ports or a managed six-port Ethernet switch, depending on the installed CPU module. The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE

Table 33: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS

CPU TYPE 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 9S COM1 RS485 10Base-F and 10Base-T Redundant 10Base-F 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX 10/100Base-T 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX Ethernet switch module with two 10/100Base-T and four 100Base-FX ports COM2 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485

3-22

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

Shielded twisted-pairs

Ground at remote device

BNC Co-axial cable

IRIG-B output

BNC BNC Co-axial cable

IRIG-B output

CPU

Co-axial cable

100Base-FL Shielded twisted-pairs

NORMAL

Rx1

10Base-FL 10Base-T

NORMAL

COM1 9G

MM fiber optic cable Shielded twisted-pairs

Tx1

100Base-F ALTERNATE

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

Ground at remote device

+
BNC BNC

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input

+
BNC

+
BNC BNC

3
CPU CPU CPU CPU 9N

CPU

Co-axial cable

Tx1 Tx2

Rx1 Rx2

10Base-FL 10Base-F 10Base-T

NORMAL ALTERNATE

COM1 9H

MM fiber optic cable

Shielded twisted-pairs

10/100Base-T NORMAL COM1

Shielded twisted-pairs

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

Ground at remote device

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

+
BNC BNC

Co-axial cable

Co-axial cable
Rx1

CPU

100Base-FL

NORMAL

Shielded twisted-pairs MM fiber optic cable

Rx1

10/100Base-T

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

Tx1

100Base-FL NORMAL COM1

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

+
BNC BNC

Co-axial cable

CPU

Rx1 Rx2

100Base-FL

Rx1 Rx2

100Base-FL

NORMAL

COM1 9K

MM fiber optic cable Shielded twisted-pairs

Tx1 Tx2

Tx2

100Base-F ALTERNATE

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

Shielded twisted-pairs

10/100Base-T

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

+
BNC

Ground at remote device

D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

Co-axial cable

+
COMMON

RS485 COM2 IRIG-B input IRIG-B output

+
BNC

BNC Co-axial cable

CPU

BNC Co-axial cable

Rx1 Rx2 Rx1 Rx1

100Base-FX 100Base-FX 100Base-FX 100Base-FX

MM fiber optic cable MM fiber optic cable MM fiber optic cable 100Base-T cable 100Base-T cable 110 to 250 V DC 100 to 240 V AC

Tx2 Tx1 Tx1

Fiber ports

10/100Base-T 10/100Base-T

Copper ports Power supply

CPU

+ W1a W2b W1a GROUND

MM fiber optic cable

Tx1

842765A5.CDR

Figure 324: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

COM1 9R

SM fiber optic cable

Tx1

NORMAL

COM1 9P

SM fiber optic cable

Tx1

3-23

3.2 WIRING b) RS485 PORTS

3 HARDWARE

RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these ports, continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible. To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485 terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.

Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed. Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.

Figure 325: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION

3-24

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS

3.2 WIRING

ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION

The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode and single-mode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The 9H, 9K, 9M, and 9R modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy. The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter, 62.5 m for 100 Mbps. For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-25

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE 3.2.9 IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.

GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM

GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL

3
IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED)

RELAY
4B 4A RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE + BNC (IN) IRIG-B(+) IRIG-B(-) RECEIVER

BNC (OUT) REPEATER

TO OTHER DEVICES (DC-SHIFT ONLY)

827756A5.CDR

Figure 326: IRIG-B CONNECTION The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down.

Figure 327: IRIG-B REPEATER Using an amplitude modulated receiver will cause errors up to 1 ms in event time-stamping.
NOTE

NOTE

Using an amplitude modulated receiver will also cause errors of up to 1 ms in metered synchrophasor values. Using the IRIG-B repeater function in conjunction with synchrophasors is not recommended, as the repeater adds a 40 s delay to the IRIG-B signal. This results in a 1 error for each consecutive device in the string as reported in synchrophasors.

3-26

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3.3DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION

The G60 direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input and output feature uses the communications channels provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay. The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
UR #1
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
842006A1.CDR

UR #2

UR #3

UR #4

Figure 328: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1 Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #1

UR #2

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #3

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #4

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

842007A1.CDR

Figure 329: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to crossover from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-27

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE

UR #1

Tx Rx

Channel #1
Tx1

UR #2

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

Channel #2

UR #3

Tx Rx
842013A1.CDR

Figure 330: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors. Not all the direct input and output communications modules may be applicable to the G60 relay. Only the modules specified in the order codes are available as direct input and output communications modules.
NOTE

Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 1 of 2)

MODULE 2A 2B 2E 2F 2G 2H 2S 2T 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M SPECIFICATION C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, 1 channel Bi-phase, 2 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels Six-port managed Ethernet switch with high voltage power supply Six-port managed Ethernet switch with low voltage power supply 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel 1550 nm, single-mode, laser, 2 channels Channel 1 - RS422; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser Channel 1 - G.703; channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, laser IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, laser, 1 channel Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels Channel 1: RS422, channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED

3-28

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE Table 34: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS (Sheet 2 of 2)

MODULE 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7V 7W SPECIFICATION Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1: RS422, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser Channel 1: G.703, channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, laser G.703, 1 channel G.703, 2 channels RS422, 1 channel RS422, 2 channels, 2 clock inputs RS422, 2 channels

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION

3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS

The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: Connection Location: 7A / 7B / 7C Slot X 7H / 7I / 7J Slot X

RX1 TX1

RX2 TX2 1 Channel 2 Channels

831719A2.CDR

Figure 331: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: Connection Location: 72/ 7D Slot X TX1 RX1 73/ 7K Slot X TX1 RX1

TX2 RX2

1 Channel

2 Channels

831720A3.CDR

Figure 332: LASER FIBER MODULES When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-29

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE

a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to this module.
NOTE

AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Shield

Inter-relay communications

G.703 channel 1

Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

Surge
Shield Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 channel 2

Surge

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b

842773A1.CDR

Figure 333: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear terminal assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7R
Tx Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 CHANNEL 1

Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 CHANNEL 1

SURGE
Shld. Tx -

SURGE
Shld. Tx Tx + Rx +

COMM.

Tx + Rx +

SURGE

SURGE
831727A2.CDR

Figure 334: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and B is equivalent to .

NOTE

b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S). The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

2. 3. 4. 5.

3-30

G60 Generator Protection System

COMM.

G.703 CHANNEL 2

Rx -

G.703 CHANNEL 2

Shld.

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b

Shld.

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 6.

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 335: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING Table 35: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES S1 S5 and S6 FUNCTION OFF octet timing disabled ON octet timing 8 kHz S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode

c) G.703 OCTET TIMING If octet timing is enabled (on), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When G60s are connected back to back, octet timing should be disabled (off). d) G.703 TIMING MODES There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default). Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the internal timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for octet timing (S1 = OFF) and timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF). Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF).

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-31

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:

3 HARDWARE

842752A1.CDR

e) G.703 TEST MODES

In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.

DMR

G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX

G7R
842774A1.CDR

Figure 336: G.703 MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/ transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the interface.

DMR

G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX

G7R
842775A1.CDR

Figure 337: G.703 DUAL LOOPBACK MODE

3-32

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE

a) DESCRIPTION There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel RS422 (module 7T) and dual-channel RS422 (module 7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair cable is recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices. The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows: Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both. Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b.

The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Single-channel RS422 module Dual-channel RS422 module

Clock
COM

Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shield

Surge

RS422 channel 2

Clock
COM

~ indicates the slot position

Surge

842776A3.CDR

Figure 338: RS422 INTERFACE CONNECTIONS The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.

Figure 339: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO-CHANNEL APPLICATION VIA MULTIPLEXERS The RS422 interface may be used for single channel or two channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems. When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

Inter-relay communications

~ 3b ~ 3a ~ 2a ~ 4b ~ 6a ~ 7a ~ 8b ~ 2b ~ 8a

Rx Tx + Rx + Shield

Rx + Shield

Inter-relay comms.

Tx +

RS422

RS422 channel 1

~ 3b ~ 3a ~ 2a ~ 4b ~ 6a ~ 5b ~ 5a ~ 4a ~ 6b ~ 7b ~ 7a ~ 8b ~ 2b ~ 8a

3-33

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE

Data module 1
Signal name

Tx1(+) Tx1(-)

RS422 CHANNEL 1

Rx1(+) Rx1(-) Shld.

CLOCK

+ Tx2(+) Tx2(-)

RS422 CHANNEL 2

Rx2(+) Rx2(-) Shld. com

SURGE

W 2a W 3b W 4b W 3a W 6a W 7a W 8b W 4a W 5b W 6b W 5a W 7b W 2b W 8a

SD(A) - Send data SD(B) - Send data RD(A) - Received data RD(B) - Received data RS(A) - Request to send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to send (RTS) RT(A) - Receive timing RT(B) - Receive timing CS(A) - Clear To send CS(B) - Clear To send Local loopback Remote loopback Signal ground ST(A) - Send timing ST(B) - Send timing

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

Data module 2
Signal name TT(A) - Terminal timing TT(B) - Terminal timing SD(A) - Send data SD(B) - Send data RD(A) - Received data RD(B) - Received data RS(A) - Request to send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to send (RTS) CS(A) - Clear To send CS(B) - Clear To send Local loopback Remote loopback Signal ground ST(A) - Send timing ST(B) - Send timing 831022A3.CDR

Figure 340: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION Data module 1 provides timing to the G60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer. c) TRANSMIT TIMING The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.

Tx Clock

Tx Data

Figure 341: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS d) RECEIVE TIMING The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.

3-34

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (digital phase lock loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (serial communication controller) receive clock. 3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING

Rx1 + Shield

Tx2

Rx2

Fiber channel 2 Surge

~ 8a

842777A1.CDR

Figure 342: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (data communications equipment) units. 3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus fiber interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for additional details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces. When using a laser Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the maximum optical input power to the receiver.
WARNING

Shield Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 channel 1

Surge

Tx2 Rx2

Fiber channel 2

842778A1.CDR

Figure 343: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

7E, 7F, 7G, Inter-relay communications 7Q,75

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 3a ~ 3b

Inter-relay comms.

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 2b ~ 2a ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 4b ~ 6a

COM Tx1 + Rx1 Tx1

RS422 channel 1

7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 74

Clock (channel 1)

3-35

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE

The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (modules types 2G, 2H, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) for 128 kbps (with n fixed at 2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows:. IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2 64 kbps optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules). Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber. Fiber optic mode: multi-mode. Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km. Fiber optic connector: type ST. Wavelength: 830 40 nm. Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.

The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

3-36

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. The IEEE C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 76, or 77 module): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 344: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-37

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE

The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multi-mode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows: Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps). Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber. Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver. Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km. Fiber optic connector: type ST. Wavelength: 1300 40 nm. Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.

It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be internal timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.

3-38

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the timing selection switches (channel 1, channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 345: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-39

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.4MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3 HARDWARE 3.4.1 OVERVIEW

The type 2S and 2T embedded managed switch modules are supported by UR-series relays containing type 9S CPU modules with revisions 5.5x and higher. The modules communicate to the G60 through an internal Ethernet port (referred to as the UR port or port 7) and provide an additional six external Ethernet ports: two 10/100Base-T ports and four multimode ST 100Base-FX ports. The Ethernet switch module should be powered up before or at the same time as the G60. Otherwise, the switch module will not be detected on power up and the EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: ORDERCODE XXX self-test warning will be issued. 3.4.2 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE HARDWARE

NOTE

The type 2S and 2T managed Ethernet switch modules provide two 10/100Base-T and four multimode ST 100Base-FX external Ethernet ports accessible through the rear of the module. In addition, a serial console port is accessible from the front of the module (requires the front panel faceplate to be open). The pin assignment for the console port signals is shown in the following table. Table 36: CONSOLE PORT PIN ASSIGNMENT
PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 to 9 SIGNAL CD RXD TXD N/A GND N/A DESCRIPTION Carrier detect (not used) Receive data (input) Transmit data (output) Not used Signal ground Not used

Two 10/100Base-T ports

Four 100Base-FX multimode ports with ST connectors

RS232 console port

Independent power supply. Options: 2S: high-voltage 2T: low-voltage

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

842867A2.CDR

Figure 346: MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES HARDWARE

3-40

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 3.4.3 MANAGED SWITCH LED INDICATORS

The 10/100Base-T and 100Base-FX ports have LED indicators to indicate the port status. The 10/100Base-T ports have three LEDs to indicate connection speed, duplex mode, and link activity. The 100Base-FX ports have one LED to indicate linkup and activity.

Connection speed indicator (OFF = 10 Mbps; ON = 100 Mbps) Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity) Duplex mode indicator (OFF = half-duplex; ON = full-duplex)

Link indicator (ON = link active; FLASHING = activity)

842868A2.CDR

Figure 347: ETHERNET SWITCH LED INDICATORS 3.4.4 CONFIGURING THE MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULE A suitable IP/gateway and subnet mask must be assigned to both the switch and the UR relay for correct operation. The Switch has been shipped with a default IP address of 192.168.1.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Consult your network administrator to determine if the default IP address, subnet mask or default gateway needs to be modified. Do not connect to network while configuring the switch module.
CAUTION

a) CONFIGURING THE SWITCH MODULE IP SETTINGS In our example configuration of both the Switchs IP address and subnet mask must be changed to 3.94.247.229 and 255.255.252.0 respectively. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway can be configured using either EnerVista UR Setup software, the Switchs Secure Web Management (SWM), or through the console port using CLI. 1. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Configure IP menu item to open the Ethernet switch configuration window.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-41

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES 2.

3 HARDWARE

Enter 3.94.247.229 in the IP Address field and 255.255.252.0 in the Subnet Mask field, then click OK. The software will send the new settings to the G60 and prompt as follows when complete.

Cycle power to the G60 and switch module to activate the new settings.

b) SAVING THE ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS TO A SETTINGS FILE

The G60 allows the settings information for the Ethernet switch module to be saved locally as a settings file. This file contains the advanced configuration details for the switch not contained within the standard G60 settings file. This feature allows the switch module settings to be saved locally before performing firmware upgrades. Saving settings files is also highly recommended before making any change to the module configuration or creating new setting files. The following procedure describes how to save local settings files for the Ethernet switch module. 1. 2. Select the desired device from site tree in the online window. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File > Retreive Settings File item from the device settings tree. The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.

Enter an appropriate folder and file name and click Save.

All settings files will be saved as text files and the corresponding file extension automatically assigned. c) UPLOADING ETHERNET SWITCH SETTINGS FILES TO THE MODULE The following procedure describes how to upload local settings files to the Ethernet switch module. It is highly recommended that the current settings are saved to a settings file before uploading a new settings file. It is highly recommended to place the switch offline while transferring setting files to the switch. When transferring settings files from one switch to another, the user must reconfigure the IP address.
NOTE

1. 2.

Select the desired device from site tree in the online window. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Ethernet Switch Settings File > Transfer Settings File item from the device settings tree.

3-42

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

The system will request the name and destination path for the settings file.

Navigate to the folder containing the Ethernet switch settings file, select the file, then click Open.

The settings file will be transferred to the Ethernet switch and the settings uploaded to the device. 3.4.5 UPLOADING G60 SWITCH MODULE FIRMWARE a) DESCRIPTION This section describes the process for upgrading firmware on a UR-2S or UR-2T switch module. There are several ways of updating firmware on a switch module: Using the EnerVista UR Setup software. Serially using the G60 switch module console port. Using FTP or TFTP through the G60 switch module console port.

It is highly recommended to use the EnerVista UR Setup software to upgrade firmware on a G60 switch module. Firmware upgrades using the serial port, TFTP, and FTP are described in detail in the switch module manual.
NOTE

b) SELECTING THE PROPER SWITCH FIRMWARE VERSION The latest switch module firmware is available as a download from the GE Multilin web site. Use the following procedure to determine the version of firmware currently installed on your switch 1. Log into the switch using the EnerVista web interface. The default switch login ID is manager and the default password is manager.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-43

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES The firmware version installed on the switch will appear on the lower left corner of the screen.

3 HARDWARE

Version: 2.1 beta

842869A1.CDR

Using the EnerVista UR Setup program, select the Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Ethernet Switch > Firmware Upload menu item. The following popup screen will appear warning that the settings will be lost when the firmware is upgraded.

It is highly recommended that you save the switch settings before upgrading the firmware.
NOTE

After saving the settings file, proceed with the firmware upload by selecting Yes to the above warning. Another window will open, asking you to point to the location of the firmware file to be uploaded.

3-44

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 4.

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

Select the firmware file to be loaded on to the Switch, and select the Open option.

The following window will pop up, indicating that the firmware file transfer is in progress.

If the firmware load was successful, the following window will appear:

Note

The switch will automatically reboot after a successful firmware file transfer.
NOTE

Once the firmware has been successfully uploaded to the switch module, load the settings file using the procedure described earlier.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

3-45

3.4 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH MODULES

3 HARDWARE 3.4.6 ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS

The following table provides details about Ethernet module self-test errors. Be sure to enable the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL setting in the PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS menu and the relevant PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings under the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH menu. Table 37: ETHERNET SWITCH SELF-TEST ERRORS
ACTIVATION SETTING (SET AS ENABLED) ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL EVENT NAME ETHERNET MODULE OFFLINE EVENT CAUSE No response has been received from the Ethernet module after five successive polling attempts. POSSIBLE CAUSES Loss of switch power. IP/gateway/subnet. Incompatibility between the CPU and the switch module. UR port (port 7) configured incorrectly or blocked Switch IP address assigned to another device in the same network. Ethernet connection broken. An inactive ports events have been enabled. The G60 failed to see the switch module on power-up, because switch wont power up or is still powering up. To clear the fault, cycle power to the G60.

3
PORT 1 EVENTS to PORT 6 EVENTS No setting required; the G60 will read the state of a general purpose input/output port on the main CPU upon power-up and create the error if there is a conflict between the input/ output state and the order code. ETHERNET PORT 1 OFFLINE to ETHERNET PORT 6 OFFLINE EQUIPMENT MISMATCH: Card XXX Missing

An active Ethernet port has returned a FAILED status. The G60 has not detected the presence of the Ethernet switch via the bus board.

3-46

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 INTRODUCTION

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (refer to the Faceplate interface section in this chapter). The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (off-line) or connected ( on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time. The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every G60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the G60 section in Chapter 1 for details. 4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with the G60 relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR-series of relays. b) USING SETTINGS FILES The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay. You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: Device definition Product setup System setup FlexLogic Grouped elements Control elements Inputs/outputs Testing

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. The following communications settings are not transferred to the G60 with settings files. Modbus Slave Address Modbus IP Port Number RS485 COM1 Baud Rate RS485 COM1 Parity COM1 Minimum Response Time

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-1

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE RS485 COM2 Baud Rate RS485 COM2 Parity COM2 Minimum Response Time COM2 Selection RRTD Slave Address RRTD Baud Rate IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number Network Address NSAP IEC61850 Config GOOSE ConfRev c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.

d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following: Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

f) FILE SUPPORT Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu. Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target. New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device. g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a G60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

NOTE

4-2

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW

The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view. Main window menu bar. Main window tool bar. Site list control bar window. Settings list control bar window. Device data view windows, with common tool bar. Settings file data view windows, with common tool bar. Workspace area with data view tabs. Status bar.

10. Quick action hot links.

3 10 4

842786A2.CDR

Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-3

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4.2EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.1 SETTINGS TEMPLATES

Setting file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An example of this is a substation that has ten similar feeders protected by ten UR-series F60 relays. In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical between all devices. The templates feature allows engineers to configure and test these common settings, then lock them so they are not available to users. For example, these locked down settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on the specific settings. The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and be made available to field engineers installing the devices. These will be settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios. The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings will be visible in EnerVista UR Setup. Settings templates can be applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is identical for both purposes. The settings template feature requires that both the EnerVista UR Setup software and the G60 firmware are at versions 5.40 or higher.
NOTE

a) ENABLING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings file template feature is disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable the settings template for UR-series settings files. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

The settings file template is now enabled and the file tree displayed in light blue. The settings file is now in template editing mode. Alternatively, the settings template can also be applied to online settings. The following procedure describes this process. 1. 2. Select an installed device from the online window of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Right-click on the selected device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option.

The software will prompt for a template password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length. 3. Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode. b) EDITING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification in EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to place the device in template editing mode. Enter the template password then click OK. Open the relevant settings windows that contain settings to be specified as viewable.

4-4

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of the settings window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.

Figure 42: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, ALL SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS LOCKED 5. Specify which settings to make viewable by clicking on them. The setting available to view will be displayed against a yellow background as shown below.

Figure 43: SETTINGS TEMPLATE VIEW, TWO SETTINGS SPECIFIED AS EDITABLE 6. 7. Click on Save to save changes to the settings template. Proceed through the settings tree to specify all viewable settings.

c) ADDING PASSWORD PROTECTION TO A TEMPLATE It is highly recommended that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security. The following procedure describes how to add password protection to a settings file template. 1. 2. Select a settings file from the offline window on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Selecting the Template Mode > Password Protect Template option.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-5

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The software will prompt for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.

Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.

The settings file template is now secured with password protection. When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It does not need to be added after the template is created.
NOTE

d) VIEWING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE

Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature: Display only those settings available for editing. Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out.

Use the following procedure to only display settings available for editing. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.

Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842858A1.CDR

Figure 44: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE COMMAND

4-6

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings tree, showing only the settings categories that contain editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings tree view is shown below.

Typical settings tree view without template applied.

Typical settings tree view with template applied via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842860A1.CDR

Figure 45: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW IN TEMPLATE MODE SETTINGS COMMAND Use the following procedure to display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or a settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Apply the template by selecting the Template Mode > View All Settings option. Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings will be shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown below.

Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.

Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via the Template Mode > View All Settings command. The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve settings be available.
842859A1.CDR

Figure 46: APPLYING TEMPLATES VIA THE VIEW ALL SETTINGS COMMAND e) REMOVING THE SETTINGS TEMPLATE It may be necessary at some point to remove a settings template. Once a template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and it will be necessary to define a new settings template. 1. 2. 3. Select an installed device or settings file from the tree menu on the left of the EnerVista UR Setup main screen. Select the Template Mode > Remove Settings Template option. Enter the template password and click OK to continue.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-7

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES 4. Verify one more time that you wish to remove the template by clicking Yes.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The EnerVista software will remove all template information and all settings will be available. 4.2.2 SECURING AND LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS The UR allows users to secure parts or all of a FlexLogic equation, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within FlexLogic equations. Secured FlexLogic equations will remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device. a) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATION ENTRIES

The following procedure describes how to lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation. 1. 2. Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the settings template feature. Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item. By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and displayed against a yellow background. The icon on the upper right of the window will also indicate that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode. 3. Specify which entries to lock by clicking on them. The locked entries will be displayed against a grey background as shown in the example below.

Figure 47: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES IN EDIT MODE 4. 5. 6. Click on Save to save and apply changes to the settings template. Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template. Apply a password to the template then click OK to secure the FlexLogic equation.

4-8

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

Once the template has been applied, users will only be able to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template. The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries in the above procedure is shown below.

Typical FlexLogic entries without template applied.

Typical FlexLogic entries locked with template via the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR

Figure 48: LOCKING FLEXLOGIC ENTRIES THROUGH SETTING TEMPLATES The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view (as shown below) and on the front panel display.

Figure 49: SECURED FLEXLOGIC IN GRAPHICAL VIEW b) LOCKING FLEXLOGIC EQUATIONS TO A SERIAL NUMBER A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations can also be locked to a specific UR serial number. Once the desired FlexLogic entries in a settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a specific serial number. 1. 2. Select the settings file in the offline window. Right-click on the file and select the Edit Settings File Properties item.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-9

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES The following window is displayed.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

Figure 410: TYPICAL SETTINGS FILE PROPERTIES WINDOW

Enter the serial number of the G60 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.

The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the G60 device specified by the serial number. 4.2.3 SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a G60 device have been changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transfered to a G60 device, the date, time, and serial number of the G60 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local PC. This information can be compared with the G60 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised. The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the G60 device or obtained from the G60 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability information to the settings file.

SETTINGS FILE TRANSFERRED TO UR-SERIES DEVICE

The serial number and last setting change date are stored in the UR-series device.

The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer date are added to the settings file when settings files are transferred to the device. Compare transfer dates in the settings file and the UR-series device to determine if security has been compromised.

SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND ADDED TO SETTINGS FILE.

842864A1.CDR

Figure 411: SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY MECHANISM With respect to the above diagram, the traceability feature is used as follows.

4-10

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 1. 2.

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES

The transfer date of a setting file written to a G60 is logged in the relay and can be viewed via EnerVista UR Setup or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a setting file saved to a local PC is logged in EnerVista UR Setup. Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future will indicate if any changes have been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.

a) SETTINGS FILE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they sent to an G60 device. The G60 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup offline window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings file device definition

4
842863A1.CDR

Figure 412: DEVICE DEFINITION SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in settings report

842862A1.CDR

Figure 413: SETTINGS FILE REPORT SHOWING TRACEABILITY DATA

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-11

4.2 EXTENDED ENERVISTA UR SETUP FEATURES b) ONLINE DEVICE TRACEABILITY INFORMATION

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The G60 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista UR Setup online window as shown in the example below.

Traceability data in online device actual values page

842865A1.CDR

Figure 414: TRACEABILITY DATA IN ACTUAL VALUES WINDOW This infomormation if also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION LAST SETTING CHANGE

c) ADDITIONAL TRACEABILITY RULES

The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file. If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed from the settings file. If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings file.

4-12

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3FACEPLATE INTERFACE a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.3.1 FACEPLATE

Five column LED indicator panel

Display Keypad

4
Front panel RS232 port

User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
Figure 415: UR-SERIES ENHANCED FACEPLATE b) STANDARD FACEPLATE

842810A1.CDR

The front panel interface is one of two supported interfaces, the other interface being EnerVista UR Setup software. The front panel interface consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following figure shows the horizontal arrangement of the faceplate panels.
LED panel 1 LED panel 2 LED panel 3

Front panel RS232 port

Display

Small user-programmable (control) pushbuttons 1 to 7

User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 12

Keypad
827801A7.CDR

Figure 416: UR-SERIES STANDARD HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-13

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

The following figure shows the vertical arrangement of the faceplate panels for relays ordered with the vertical option.

DISPLAY

HELP

MESSAGE

ESCAPE

KEYPAD

ENTER

VALUE

+/-

LED PANEL 3

4
STATUS

LED PANEL 2
EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND

IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP

RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3

LED PANEL 1

Figure 417: UR-SERIES STANDARD VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS 4.3.2 LED INDICATORS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and event cause LEDs, and the next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC. The USER keys are not used in this unit.

Figure 418: TYPICAL LED INDICATOR PANEL FOR ENHANCED FACEPLATE The status indicators in the first column are described below. IN SERVICE: This LED indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs, outputs, and internal systems are OK, and that the device has been programmed.

827830A1.CDR

842811A1.CDR

4-14

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES TROUBLE: This LED indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: This LED indicates that the relay is in test mode.

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

TRIP: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; as such, a reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: This LED indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: This LED indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

The event cause indicators in the first column are described below. These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag waiting to be reset. VOLTAGE: This LED indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: This LED indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: This LED indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: This LED indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: This LED indicates phase A was involved. PHASE B: This LED indicates phase B was involved. PHASE C: This LED indicates phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved.

The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label package of every G60, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels. b) STANDARD FACEPLATE The standar faceplate consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC. The USER keys are not used in this unit.

STATUS

EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND

IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP

RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3

842781A1.CDR

Figure 419: LED PANEL 1 STATUS INDICATORS: IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed. TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-15

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the reset command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS: These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag waiting to be reset. VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: Indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: Indicates phase A was involved. PHASE B: Indicates phase B was involved. PHASE C: Indicates phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates that neutral or ground was involved.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE INDICATORS: The second and third provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

842782A1.CDR

Figure 420: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2: The default labels are intended to represent: GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group. SYNCHROCHECK NO1(2) IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element. Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.

NOTE

The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section.

4-16

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

842785A1.CDR

Figure 421: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS) 4.3.3 CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS a) ENHANCED FACEPLATE The following procedure requires the pre-requisites listed below. EnerVista UR Setup software is installed and operational. The G60 settings have been saved to a settings file. The G60 front panel label cutout sheet (GE Multilin part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from http:// www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur and printed. Small-bladed knife.

This procedure describes how to create custom LED labels for the enhanced front panel display. 1. 2. Start the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the Front Panel Report item at the bottom of the menu tree for the settings file. The front panel report window will be displayed.

Figure 422: FRONT PANEL REPORT WINDOW 3. 4. 5. Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbuttons in the fields provided. Feed the G60 front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window. When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-17

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 6.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

Remove the G60 label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These tabs will be used for removal of the default and custom LED labels. It is important that the tool be used EXACTLY as shown below, with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.

NOTE

The label package shipped with every G60 contains the three default labels shown below, the custom label template sheet, and the label removal tool. If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match them. If you require custom labels, follow the procedures below to remove the original labels and insert the new ones. The following procedure describes how to setup and use the label removal tool. 1. Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown below.

Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown below.

The following procedure describes how to remove the LED labels from the G60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.

4-18

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 1.

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Make sure the bent tabs are pointing away from the relay.

Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the LED label.

Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown below.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-19

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown below.

The following procedure describes how to remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the G60 enhanced front panel and insert the custom labels.

Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown below. Make sure the bent tab is pointing away from the relay.

Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown below. This will attach the label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.

4-20

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 3.

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label as shown below.

Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the buttons, as shown below.

b) STANDARD FACEPLATE Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/ This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-21

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin part number: 1501-0014).

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

F60

FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY

Push in and gently lift up the cover.

842771A1.CDR

Pop out the LED module and/or the blank module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic covers.

( LED MODULE )

( BLANK MODULE )

4
F60
FEEDER MANAGEMENT RELAY
R

842722A1.CDR

3. 4.

Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side. Put the clear Lexan front cover back into place.

The following items are required to customize the G60 display module: Black and white or color printer (color preferred). Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template. 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015).

The following procedure describes how to customize the G60 display module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use. Print the template(s) to a local printer. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates. 4.3.4 DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. Messages are descriptive and should not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user-defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display. 4.3.5 KEYPAD Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets. The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.

PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION ACTUAL VALUES STATUS SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP Press the MESSAGE DOWN key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE UP and DOWN keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header. From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once to display the first sub-header (Password Security). ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25% To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE DOWN key. The last message appears as shown. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for Display Properties. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key once more and this will display the first setting for Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE DOWN key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header. Press the MESSAGE LEFT key once to move back to the first sub-header message. Press the MENU key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay. Press the MENU key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers.

PASSWORD SECURITY

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-25

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.3.8 CHANGING SETTINGS

a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s MINIMUM: MAXIMUM: 0.5 10.0 Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the HELP key again to view the next context sensitive help message. For example, select the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH setting.

MESSAGE TIME

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available. 0 to 9 and decimal point: The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE LEFT key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display. VALUE keys: The VALUE UP key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE UP key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE DOWN key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE DOWN key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value. As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered. Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press ENTER to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.

FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 2.5 s NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED

b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members. ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command", "Setting", and "Factory Service".

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE UP key displays the next selection while the VALUE DOWN key displays the previous selection. ACCESS LEVEL: Setting NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process. If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.

4-26

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages. For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the decimal to enter text edit mode. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position. Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1. Press ENTER to store the text. If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.

d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.

To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed. SETTINGS SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES

INSTALLATION 5. 6.

RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed

After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed". Press the ENTER key. RELAY SETTINGS: Programmed NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED

RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed 7.

When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the In Service LED will turn on.

e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-27

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the faceplate RS232 connection. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. To enter the initial setting (or command) password, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE DOWN key until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE RIGHT key until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message appears on the display. PASSWORD SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: --------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: --------5. 6. 7. 8. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE UP or DOWN key to change the selection to Yes. Press the ENTER key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the ENTER key. When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press ENTER. CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: Yes ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ########## VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ########## NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED 9. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.

f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered. In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding encrypted password from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding. g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a three-minute time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the faceplate interface for the next ten minutes. The TOO MANY ATTEMPTS BLOCKED

4-28

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

FOR 10 MIN! flash message will appear upon activation of the ten minute timeout or any other time a user attempts any change to the defined tier during the ten minute timeout. The LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to

Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout. In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

4-29

4.3 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4-30

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW

5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES CLEAR RELAY RECORDS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS USER MAP REAL TIME CLOCK USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FLEX STATE PARAMETERS USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS DIRECT I/O TELEPROTECTION INSTALLATION

See page 5-8. See page 5-11. See page 5-13. See page 5-14. See page 5-32. See page 5-33. See page 5-34. See page 5-35. See page 5-37. See page 5-38. See page 5-41. See page 5-42. See page 5-43. See page 5-48. See page 5-49. See page 5-51. See page 5-59. See page 5-59.

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP

AC INPUTS POWER SYSTEM SIGNAL SOURCES

See page 5-61. See page 5-62. See page 5-63.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-1

5.1 OVERVIEW BREAKERS SWITCHES FLEXCURVES PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXELEMENTS NON-VOLATILE LATCHES SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2

5 SETTINGS

See page 5-66. See page 5-70. See page 5-73. See page 5-80.

See page 5-112. See page 5-112. See page 5-113. See page 5-117.

See page 5-118.

SETTING GROUP 6 SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS SELECTOR SWITCH UNDERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY OOB ACCUMULATION SYNCHROCHECK DIGITAL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS

See page 5-193. See page 5-194. See page 5-200. See page 5-201. See page 5-202. See page 5-204. See page 5-206. See page 5-210. See page 5-213.

5-2

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS MONITORING ELEMENTS TRIP BUS SETTINGS INPUTS / OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS RESETTING DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION IEC 61850 GOOSE ANALOGS SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS RTD INPUTS DCMA OUTPUTS SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

5.1 OVERVIEW

See page 5-215. See page 5-216.

See page 5-218. See page 5-220. See page 5-221. See page 5-223. See page 5-224. See page 5-225. See page 5-226. See page 5-226. See page 5-227. See page 5-227. See page 5-228. See page 5-231. See page 5-233.

See page 5-235. See page 5-236. See page 5-238.

See page 5-242. See page 5-242. See page 5-242.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

CT2

Winding 1 current

UR-series relay

Winding 1

Power transformer
Winding 2

CT3

CT4
827791A3.CDR

Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings. A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure. Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device. The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as Wdg 1 Current. Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities. b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module. A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage. Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 < bank 1 > < bank 2 > CT/VT MODULE 2 < bank 3 > < bank 4 > CT/VT MODULE 3 < bank 5 > < bank 6 >

5-6

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.1 OVERVIEW

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM CT/VT Module CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) MAXIMUM NUMBER 2 8 4

c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5. For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels. Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5. The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes. The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-7

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2PRODUCT SETUP a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY

5 SETTINGS 5.2.1 SECURITY

SECURITY
MESSAGE

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS ACCESS SUPERVISION PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only)

See page 59. See page 510.

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Two levels of password security are provided via the ACCESS LEVEL setting: command and setting. The factory service level is not available and intended for factory use only. The following operations are under command password supervision: Changing the state of virtual inputs. Clearing the event records. Clearing the oscillography records. Changing the date and time. Clearing energy records. Clearing the data logger. Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states.

The following operations are under setting password supervision: Changing any setting. Test mode operation.

The command and setting passwords are defaulted to 0 when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to 0, the password security feature is disabled. The G60 supports password entry from a local or remote connection. Local access is defined as any access to settings or commands via the faceplate interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through the faceplate RS232 port. Remote access is defined as any access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any changes to the local or remote passwords enables this functionality. When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the G60, the remote password must be used. If the connection is to the RS232 port of the faceplate, the local password must be used. The PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS settings allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.

5-8

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) LOCAL PASSWORDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS

MESSAGE

CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password

MESSAGE

Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to Yes via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________. VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________. NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.

To gain write access to a Restricted setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to Setting and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. Accessibility automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE

c) REMOTE PASSWORDS The remote password settings are only visible from a remote connection via the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the Settings > Product Setup > Password Security menu item to open the remote password settings window.

Figure 52: REMOTE PASSWORD SETTINGS WINDOW Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access. A command or setting password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters and are initially programmed to 0. The following procedure describes how the set the command or setting password. 1. 2. 3. Enter the new password in the Enter New Password field. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field. Click the Change button. This button will not be active until the new password matches the confirmation password.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-9

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 4.

5 SETTINGS

If the original password is not 0, then enter the original password in the Enter Password field and click the Send Password to Device button.

The new password is accepted and a value is assigned to the ENCRYPTED PASSWORD item.

If a command or setting password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding Encrypted Password value.

d) ACCESS SUPERVISION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION

ACCESS SUPERVISION
MESSAGE

ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3 PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: 5 min
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1

Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1

MESSAGE

The following access supervision settings are available. INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT: This setting specifies the number of times an incorrect password can be entered within a three-minute time span before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED and REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operands are set to On. These operands are returned to the Off state upon expiration of the lockout. PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION: This setting specifies the time that the G60 will lockout password access after the number of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting has occurred.

The G60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts. The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets. If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs or targets enabled. The access level timeout settings are shown below.

5-10

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP SECURITY ACCESS SUPERVISION ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS

MESSAGE

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 5 min SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: 30 min

Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the restricted access level. Note that the access level will set as restricted if control power is cycled. COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level. SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT: This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return to restricted access from the command password level. 5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES

DISPLAY PROPERTIES
MESSAGE

LANGUAGE: English FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25 % SCREEN SAVER FEATURE: Disabled SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: 30 min CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.020 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V

Range: English; English, French; English, Russian; English, Chinese (range dependent on order code) Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Visible only if a VFD is installed Range: Disabled, Enabled Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1 Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings. LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is dependent on the order code of the relay. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the G60 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-11

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off. VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.

The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections: 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary For Wye connections: CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
(EQ 5.4) (EQ 5.3)

CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary per-phase power cut-off = CURRENT --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary

(EQ 5.5)

where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio. For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1" PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.

We have: CT primary = 100 A, and VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary = ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V = 720.5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off. Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02 pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.

NOTE

5-12

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

MESSAGE

CLEAR USER REPORTS: Off CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Off CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Off CLEAR ENERGY: Off RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Off CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand. Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.

Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the G60 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect. Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required. For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied. 1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s

Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PRODUCT menu:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-13

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS

COMMUNICATIONS
MESSAGE

SERIAL PORTS NETWORK MODBUS PROTOCOL DNP PROTOCOL DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL TFTP PROTOCOL IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL SNTP PROTOCOL EGD PROTOCOL ETHERNET SWITCH

See below. See page 515. See page 515. See page 516. See page 519. See page 520. See page 529. See page 529. See page 529. See page 530. See page 530. See page 532.

MESSAGE

b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS

SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE

RS485 COM1 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM1 PARITY: None RS485 COM1 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM2 PARITY: None RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms

Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: None, Odd, Even Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 Range: None, Odd, Even

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

MESSAGE

The G60 is equipped with up to three independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that

5-14

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.

NOTE

c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK

NETWORK
MESSAGE

IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 SUBNET IP MASK: 0.0.0.0 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 OSI NETWORK ADDRESS (NSAP) ETHERNET OPERATION MODE: Full-Duplex

Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS. Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.

MESSAGE

These messages appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet card. The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP port number. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used. When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP port number, or any user map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-on).
NOTE

Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.
WARNING

d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL

MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502

Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the G60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each G60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol. Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-15

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP e) DNP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL

5 SETTINGS

DNP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE

DNP CHANNELS DNP ADDRESS: 65519 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER: 20000 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION: Disabled DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT: 5 s DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES: 10 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS: 1 DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP PF SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP POWER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP ENERGY DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP PF DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD: 1440 min

Range: see sub-menu below

Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

5
MESSAGE MESSAGE

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

5-16

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE: 240 DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 2 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 20 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 22 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 23 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 30 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS: 0 DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT: 120 s

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 9, 10

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 10 to 300 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

The G60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The G60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).

NOTE

The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS

DNP CHANNELS
MESSAGE

DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: NETWORK DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: COM2 - RS485

Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP

The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in non-Ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol. Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings will take effect only after power has been cycled to the relay.
NOTE

The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the G60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-17

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES

DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES

MESSAGE

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the G60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection will be aborted by the G60. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client. Relay power must be re-cycled after changing the DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting for the changes to take effect.
NOTE

f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS

DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS

MESSAGE

BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS

Point: Off

255

Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the full range of assignable parameters.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-19

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

NOTE

The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored. Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.

NOTE

g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

MESSAGE

GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION SERVER CONFIGURATION IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES MMXU DEADBANDS GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION GGIO4 ANALOG CONFIGURATION REPORT CONTROL CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol features are not available if CPU type E is ordered.

The G60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The G60 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote inputs and outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme. The GSSE/GOOSE configuration main menu is divided into two areas: transmission and reception.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION

GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

TRANSMISSION RECEPTION

The main transmission menu is shown below:

5-20

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION

TRANSMISSION
MESSAGE

GENERAL GSSE FIXED GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE

MESSAGE

The general transmission settings are shown below:

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GSSE/GOOSE... TRANSMISSION GENERAL

GENERAL

Range: 65-character ASCII string

Range: standard MAC address

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The G60 has the ability of detecting if a data item in one of the GOOSE datasets is erroneously oscillating. This can be caused by events such as errors in logic programming, inputs improperly being asserted and de-asserted, or failed station components. If erroneously oscillation is detected, the G60 will stop sending GOOSE messages from the dataset for a minimum period of one second. Should the oscillation persist after the one second time-out period, the G60 will continue to block transmission of the dataset. The G60 will assert the MAINTENANCE ALERT: GGIO Ind XXX oscill self-test error message on the front panel display, where XXX denotes the data item detected as oscillating. The configurable GOOSE feature is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs and devices from other manufacturers. Fixed GOOSE is recommended for applications that require GOOSE data transfer between UR-series IEDs. IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly. Manual configuration is possible, but third-party substation configuration software may be used to automate the process. The EnerVista UR Setupsoftware can produce IEC 61850 ICD files and import IEC 61850 SCD files produced by a substation configurator (refer to the IEC 61850 IED configuration section later in this appendix). The following example illustrates the configuration required to transfer IEC 61850 data items between two devices. The general steps required for transmission configuration are: 1. 2. 3. Configure the transmission dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.

The general steps required for reception configuration are: 1. 2. 3. Configure the reception dataset. Configure the GOOSE service settings. Configure the data.

This example shows how to configure the transmission and reception of three IEC 61850 data items: a single point status value, its associated quality flags, and a floating point analog value. The following procedure illustrates the transmission configuration. 1.
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu:

Configure the transmission dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE Set ITEM 1 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO1 status indication 1. Set ITEM 2 to GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO1 status indication 1.

The transmission dataset now contains a set of quality flags and a single point status Boolean value. The reception dataset on the receiving device must exactly match this structure. 2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 settings menu: Set CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled. Set CONFIG GSE 1 ID to an appropriate descriptive string (the default value is GOOSEOut_1). Set CONFIG GSE 1 DST MAC to a multicast address (for example, 01 00 00 12 34 56). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN PRIORITY; the default value of 4 is OK for this example. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 VLAN ID value; the default value is 0, but some switches may require this value to be 1. Set the CONFIG GSE 1 ETYPE APPID value. This setting represents the ETHERTYPE application ID and must match the configuration on the receiver (the default value is 0). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 CONFREV value. This value changes automatically as described in IEC 61850 part 7-2. For this example it can be left at its default value.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-23

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 3.

5 SETTINGS

COL GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION

Configure the data by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOsettings menu: Set GGIO1 INDICATION 1 to a FlexLogic operand used to provide the status of GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal (for example, a contact input, virtual input, a protection element status, etc.).

The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The following procedure illustrates the reception configuration. 1. Configure the reception dataset by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1 CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS settings menu: Set ITEM 1 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.q to indicate quality flags for GGIO3 status indication 1. Set ITEM 2 to GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal to indicate the status value for GGIO3 status indication 1.

The reception dataset now contains a set of quality flags, a single point status Boolean value, and a floating point analog value. This matches the transmission dataset configuration above. 2. Configure the GOOSE service settings by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1 settings menu: Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID to match the GOOSE ID string for the transmitting device. Enter GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID to match the ETHERTYPE application ID from the transmitting device. This is 0 in the example above. Set the REMOTE DEVICE 1 DATASET value. This value represents the dataset number in use. Since we are using configurable GOOSE 1 in this example, program this value as GOOSEIn 1.

Configure the data by making the following changes in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 settings menu: Set REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE to GOOSEOut_1. Set REMOTE IN 1 ITEM to Dataset Item 2. This assigns the value of the GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal single point status item to remote input 1.

Remote input 1 can now be used in FlexLogic equations or other settings. The G60 must be rebooted (control power removed and re-applied) before these settings take effect. The value of remote input 1 (Boolean on or off) in the receiving device will be determined by the GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal value in the sending device. The above settings will be automatically populated by the EnerVista UR Setup software when a complete SCD file is created by third party substation configurator software. For intercommunication between G60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. All GOOSE messages transmitted by the G60 (DNA/UserSt dataset and configurable datasets) use the IEC 61850 GOOSE messaging services (for example, VLAN support). Set the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION function to Disabled when configuration changes are required. Once changes are entered, return the CONFIG GSE 1 FUNCTION to Enabled and restart the unit for changes to take effect.
NOTE

PATH:...TRANSMISSION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA TIMES ITEM 1(64)

CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS

ITEM 1: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data

To create a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains an IEC 61850 Single Point Status indication and its associated quality flags, the following dataset items can be selected: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO1.ST.Ind1.q. The G60 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The status value for GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal is determined by the FlexLogic operand assigned to GGIO1 indication 1. Changes to this operand will result in the transmission of GOOSE messages containing the defined dataset.

5-24

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The main reception menu is applicable to configurable GOOSE only and contains the configurable GOOSE dataset items for reception:
PATH:...RECEPTION CONFIGURABLE GOOSE 1(8) CONIFIG GSE 1(64) DATA ITEMS

CONFIG GSE 1 DATASET ITEMS

ITEM 1: GGIO1.ST.Ind1.stVal

Range: all valid MMS data item references for transmitted data

The configurable GOOSE settings allow the G60 to be configured to receive a number of different datasets within IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. Up to eight different configurable datasets can be configured for reception. This is useful for intercommunication between G60 IEDs and devices from other manufacturers that support IEC 61850. For intercommunication between G60 IEDs, the fixed (DNA/UserSt) dataset can be used. The DNA/UserSt dataset contains the same DNA and UserSt bit pairs that are included in GSSE messages. To set up a G60 to receive a configurable GOOSE dataset that contains two IEC 61850 single point status indications, the following dataset items can be selected (for example, for configurable GOOSE dataset 1): GGIO3.ST.Ind1.stVal and GGIO3.ST.Ind2.stVal. The G60 will then create a dataset containing these two data items. The Boolean status values from these data items can be utilized as remote input FlexLogic operands. First, the REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) DATASET setting must be set to contain dataset GOOSEIn 1 (that is, the first configurable dataset). Then REMOTE IN 1(16) ITEM settings must be set to Dataset Item 1 and Dataset Item 2. These remote input FlexLogic operands will then change state in accordance with the status values of the data items in the configured dataset. Floating point analog values originating from MMXU logical nodes may be included in GOOSE datasets. Deadband (noninstantaneous) values can be transmitted. Received values are used to populate the GGIO3.XM.AnIn1 and higher items. Received values are also available as FlexAnalog parameters (GOOSE analog In1 and up). The main menu for the IEC 61850 server configuration is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL SERVER CONFIGURATION

SERVER CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE

IED NAME: IECDevice LD INST: LDInst LOCATION: Location IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER: 102 INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA: Enabled SERVER SCANNING: Disabled

Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

PTRC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES

The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node. For example, the logical node PTOC1 may have the name prefix abc. The full logical node name will then be abcMMXU1. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. Changes to the logical node prefixes will not take effect until the G60 is restarted. The main menu for the IEC 61850 MMXU deadbands is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL MMXU DEADBANDS

MMXU DEADBANDS
MESSAGE

MMXU1 DEADBANDS MMXU2 DEADBANDS MMXU3 DEADBANDS MMXU4 DEADBANDS

MESSAGE

The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values. The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband. The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows: phase current: 46 phase CT primary setting neutral current: 46 ground CT primary setting voltage: 275 VT ratio setting power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 phase CT primary setting 275 VT ratio setting frequency: 90 Hz power factor: 2

5-26

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS The GGIO1 status configuration points are shown below:

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION

GGIO1 STATUS CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1: 8 GGIO1 INDICATION Off GGIO1 INDICATION Off

MESSAGE

Range: 8 to 128 in steps of 8

1 2

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

GGIO1 INDICATION 128 Off

5 SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT... COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850... GGIO4... GGIO4 ANALOG 1(32) MEASURED VALUE

GGIO4 ANALOG 1 MEASURED VALUE

MESSAGE

ANALOG IN Off ANALOG IN 0.000 ANALOG IN 0.000 ANALOG IN 0.000

1 VALUE: 1 DB: 1 MIN: 1 MAX:

Range: any FlexAnalog value

Range: 0.000 to 100.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001 Range: 1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

These settings are configured as follows. ANALOG IN 1 VALUE: This setting selects the FlexAnalog value to drive the instantaneous value of each GGIO4 analog status value (GGIO4.MX.AnIn1.instMag.f). ANALOG IN 1 DB: This setting specifies the deadband for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. The deadband is used to determine when to update the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum values. ANALOG IN 1 MIN: This setting specifies the minimum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. This minimum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. ANALOG IN 1 MAX: This setting defines the maximum value for each analog value. Refer to IEC 61850-7-1 and 61850-7-3 for details. This maximum value is used to determine the deadband. The deadband is used in the determination of the deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. Note that the ANALOG IN 1 MIN and ANALOG IN 1 MAX settings are stored as IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point numbers. Because of the large range of these settings, not all values can be stored. Some values may be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

HTTP TCP PORT NUMBER: 80

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

The G60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. This feature is available only if the G60 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the G60 Main Menu. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The main menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the G60 into the Address box on the web browser. i) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS TFTP PROTOCOL

TFTP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE

TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER: 69 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER: 0 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER: 0

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the G60 over a network. The G60 operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the G60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.). j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL

MESSAGE

IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION: Disabled IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: 2404 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0 IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: 60 s IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC OTHER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000

Range: Enabled, Disabled

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-29

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The G60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The G60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the G60 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the G60 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the G60, the default thresholds will be in effect. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols cannot be used simultaneously. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (off-to-on).

NOTE

k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL

SNTP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE

SNTP FUNCTION: Disabled SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: 0.0.0.0 SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER: 123

Range: Enabled, Disabled

Range: Standard IP address format

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

The G60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the G60 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The G60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported. If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the G60 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the G60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad. To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the G60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the G60 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the G60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline. To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The G60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The G60 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error. The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality. l) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL

EGD PROTOCOL
MESSAGE

FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION SLOW PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION SLOW PROD EXCH 2 CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol feature is not available if CPU Type E is ordered.

5-30

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange. Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes. The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to consume EGD data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the exchange production rate can be configured. EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of 0 is considered invalid. The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION

FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Disable EXCH 1 DESTINATION: 0.0.0.0 EXCH 1 DATA RATE: 1000 ms EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: 0

Range: Disable, Enable

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range in decimal)

Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the fast and slow exchanges are described below: EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually unicast or broadcast. EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to 1000 ms.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-31

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data from the G60 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format; as such, it will be necessary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints. To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item. That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items.

m) ETHERNET SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS ETHERNET SWITCH

ETHERNET SWITCH
MESSAGE

SWITCH IP ADDRESS: 127.0.0.1 SWITCH MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502 PORT 1 EVENTS: Disabled PORT 2 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: standard IP address format

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

5
MESSAGE

PORT 6 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

These settings appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet switch module (type 2S or 2T). The IP address and Modbus TCP port number for the Ethernet switch module are specified in this menu. These settings are used in advanced network configurations. Please consult the network administrator before making changes to these settings. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) is the preferred interface to configure these settings. The PORT 1 EVENTS through PORT 6 EVENTS settings allow Ethernet switch module events to be logged in the event recorder. 5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP

MODBUS USER MAP

MESSAGE

ADDRESS VALUE: ADDRESS VALUE:

1: 0 2: 0

0 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

ADDRESS 256: VALUE: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.

5-32

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK

REAL TIME CLOCK

MESSAGE

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: None REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS: Disabled LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC: 0.0 hrs DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME: Disabled DST START MONTH: April DST START DAY: Sunday DST START DAY INSTANCE: First DST START HOUR: 2:00 DST STOP MONTH: April DST STOP DAY: Sunday DST STOP DAY INSTANCE: First DST STOP HOUR: 2:00

Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: 24.0 to 24.0 hrs in steps of 0.5

5-33

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1

MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #1: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #2: Off

Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY

OSCILLOGRAPHY
MESSAGE

NUMBER OF RECORDS: 15 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite TRIGGER POSITION: 50% TRIGGER SOURCE: Off AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: 16 samples/cycle DIGITAL CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNELS

Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

MESSAGE

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously. The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record. Table 51: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
RECORDS 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 32 CT/VTS 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SAMPLE RATE 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 64 64 DIGITALS 0 16 16 16 16 64 64 64 64 ANALOGS 0 0 0 4 4 16 16 16 16 CYCLES/ RECORD 1872.0 1685.0 276.0 219.5 93.5 93.5 57.6 32.3 9.5

A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite. Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle. The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle; that is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-35

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING

b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS

DIGITAL CHANNELS
MESSAGE

DIGITAL CHANNEL Off DIGITAL CHANNEL Off

1: 2:

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

A DIGITAL 1(63) CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. c) ANALOG CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY ANALOG CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNEL Off ANALOG CHANNEL Off

1: 2:

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.

MESSAGE

ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Off

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.

These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: The type of relay, The type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, et The type and number of analog input hardware modules installed.

Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad and display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows: <slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input> The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.

5-36

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.9 DATA LOGGER

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER
MESSAGE

DATA LOGGER MODE: Continuous DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: Off DATA LOGGER RATE: 60000 ms DATA LOGGER CHNL Off DATA LOGGER CHNL Off
MESSAGE

Range: Continuous, Trigger

Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

MESSAGE

1: 2:

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.

MESSAGE

DATA LOGGER CHNL 16: Off DATA LOGGER CONFIG: 0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only

MESSAGE

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost. For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table. Table 52: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE 15 ms CHANNELS 1 8 9 16 1000 ms 1 8 9 16 60000 ms 1 8 9 16 3600000 ms 1 8 9 DAYS 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.1 0.1 0.1 45.4 5.6 5 2.8 2727.5 340.9 303 STORAGE CAPACITY 954 s 120 s 107 s 60 s 65457 s 8182 s 7273 s 4091 s 3927420 s 490920 s 436380 s 254460 s 235645200 s 29455200 s 26182800 s

Changing any setting affecting data logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE

DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to Continuous, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-37

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger will begin to record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset the data logger to be ready for the next trigger. DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the mode is set to Trigger. DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded. DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/ VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off without over-writing old data. 5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
MESSAGE

LED TEST TRIP & ALARM LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED2

See below See page 540. See page 540.

MESSAGE

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED48

b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST

LED TEST
MESSAGE

LED TEST FUNCTION: Disabled LED TEST CONTROL: Off

Range: Disabled, Enabled.

Range: FlexLogic operand

When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The test consists of three stages. 1. All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.

5-38

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 2.

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.

When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress. A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder. The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.

READY TO TEST
Reset the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand

rising edge of the control input

Start the software image of the LEDs

Restore the LED states from the software image

Set the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand control input is on

STAGE 1 (all LEDs on)

dropping edge of the control input Wait 1 second

time-out (1 minute)

rising edge of the control input

STAGE 2 (one LED on at a time)

rising edge of the control input

Wait 1 second

rising edge of the control input

STAGE 3 (one LED off at a time)

rising edge of the control input

842011A1.CDR

Figure 53: LED TEST SEQUENCE APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1: Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through user-programmable pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-39

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

The test will be initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton. APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2: Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1. After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start stage 2. Once stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton. c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS

TRIP & ALARM LEDS

MESSAGE

TRIP LED INPUT: Off ALARM LED INPUT: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced faceplate) and on LED panel 1 (standard faceplate). Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1
MESSAGE

LED 1 OPERAND: Off LED 1 TYPE: Self-Reset

Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: Self-Reset, Latched

There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. For the standard faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows. LED Panel 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 24 LED Panel 3: user programmable LEDs 25 through 48

For the enhanced faceplate, the LEDs are located as follows. LED column 2: user-programmable LEDs 1 through 12 LED column 3: user-programmable LEDs 13 through 24 LED column 4: user-programmable LEDs 25 through 36 LED column 5: user-programmable LEDs 37 through 48

Refer to the LED indicators section in chapter 4 for additional information on the location of these indexed LEDs. The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Self-Reset (the default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.

5-40

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Table 53: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

SETTING LED 1 operand LED 2 operand LED 3 operand LED 4 operand LED 5 operand LED 6 operand LED 7 operand LED 8 operand LED 9 operand LED 10 operand LED 11 operand LED 12 operand PARAMETER SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Off Off Off Off Off Off SETTING LED 13 operand LED 14 operand LED 15 operand LED 16 operand LED 17 operand LED 18 operand LED 19 operand LED 20 operand LED 21 operand LED 22 operand LED 23 operand LED 24 operand PARAMETER Off Off Off Off SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 2 SYNC OP Off Off Off Off Off Off

Refer to the Control of setting groups example in the Control elements section of this chapter for group activation. 5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS

MESSAGE

DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION: Enabled DIRECT DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled REMOTE DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled PRI. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled SEC. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled BATTERY FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled SNTP FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled IRIG-B FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a primary fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a redundant fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE

All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets. Most of the minor alarms can be disabled if desired. When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay self-tests section in chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms. To enable the Ethernet switch failure function, ensure that the ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FUNCTION is Enabled in this menu.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-41

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the standard and enhanced front panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays. The location of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.

Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR

Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE) An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the standard faceplate when the G60 is ordered with the twelve user-programmable pushbutton option.
STATUS IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 USER 2 USER 1 RESET

THREE STANDARD CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

USER 4 USER 5 USER 6 USER 7

FOUR EXTRA OPTIONAL CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

842733A2.CDR

Figure 55: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE) Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons. Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs. An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed.

5-42

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

SETTING

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Enabled=1 SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/ BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1 SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1

When applicable

AND

RUN OFF ON TIMER 0 100 msec FLEXLOGIC OPERAND CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON 842010A2.CDR

Figure 56: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC 5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1(16)

USER PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: 0.0 s PUSHBTN 1 SET: Off PUSHBTN 1 RESET: Off PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: 1.0 s PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: Off PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: Off PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: Off PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: Disabled PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-43

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The optional user-programmable pushbuttons (specified in the order code) provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The number of available pushbuttons is dependent on the faceplate module ordered with the relay. Type P faceplate: standard horizontal faceplate with 12 user-programmable pushbuttons. Type Q faceplate: enhanced horizontal faceplate with 16 user-programmable pushbuttons.

The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-programmable pushbuttons are under the control level of password protection. The user-configurable pushbuttons for the enhanced faceplate are shown below.

USER LABEL 1

USER LABEL 2

USER LABEL 3

USER LABEL 4

USER LABEL 5

USER LABEL 6

USER LABEL 7

USER LABEL 8

USER LABEL 9

USER LABEL 10

USER LABEL 11

USER LABEL 12

USER LABEL 13

USER LABEL 14

USER LABEL 15

USER LABEL 16

842814A1.CDR

Figure 57: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (ENHANCED FACEPLATE) The user-configurable pushbuttons for the standard faceplate are shown below.

1
USER LABEL

3
USER LABEL

5
USER LABEL

7
USER LABEL

9
USER LABEL

11
USER LABEL

2
USER LABEL

4
USER LABEL

6
USER LABEL

8
USER LABEL

10
USER LABEL

12
USER LABEL
842779A1.CDR

Figure 58: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (STANDARD FACEPLATE) Both the standard and enhanced faceplate pushbuttons can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEmultilin.com. The EnerVista UR Setup software can also be used to create labels for the enhanced faceplate. Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF). These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active, the ANY PB ON operand will be asserted. Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting. The pushbuttons can be automatically controlled by activating the operands assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET (for latched and self-reset mode) and PUSHBTN 1 RESET (for latched mode only) settings. The pushbutton reset status is declared when the PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand is asserted. The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons is dependent on whether latched or self-reset mode is programmed. Latched mode: In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting or by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton. The pushbutton maintains the set state until deactivated by the reset command or after a user-specified time delay. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control power. The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET setting or by directly pressing the associated active front panel pushbutton.

5-44

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if control is not executed within a specified time period. Self-reset mode: In self-reset mode, a pushbutton will remain active for the time it is pressed (the pulse duration) plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand remains assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting has no effect on the pulse duration.
TIME

The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in self-reset mode when the dropout delay specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT setting expires. The pulse duration of the remote set, remote reset, or local pushbutton must be at least 50 ms to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that may cause transient assertion of the operating signals.

NOTE

The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings, respectively. If local locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote locking is applied, the pushbutton will ignore set and reset commands executed through FlexLogic operands. The locking functions are not applied to the autorestart feature. In this case, the inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to prevent the pushbutton function from being activated and ensuring one-at-a-time select operation. The locking functions can also be used to prevent the accidental pressing of the front panel pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control supervision. Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder and displayed as target messages. In latched mode, user-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is on or changing to off. PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to SelfReset, the control logic is activated by the pulse (longer than 100 ms) issued when the pushbutton is being physically pressed or virtually pressed via a FlexLogic operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting. When in Self-Reset mode and activated locally, the pushbutton control logic asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being physically pressed, and after being released the deactivation of the operand is delayed by the drop out timer. The Off operand is asserted when the pushbutton element is deactivated. If the pushbutton is activated remotely, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the corresponding On FlexLogic operand only for the time period specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and Off on each button press or by virtually activating the pushbutton (assigning set and reset operands). When in the Latched mode, the states of the FlexLogic operands are stored in a non-volatile memory. Should the power supply be lost, the correct state of the pushbutton is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay. PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-definable displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the on to the off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release. The length of the Off message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. PUSHBTN 1 HOLD: This setting specifies the time required for a pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that any pushbutton operation will require the pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 50 ms. This minimum time is required prior to activating the pushbutton hold timer.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-45

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

PUSHBTN 1 SET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to operate the pushbutton element and to assert PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 100 ms. PUSHBTN 1 RESET: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to reset pushbutton element and to assert PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand. This setting is applicable only if pushbutton is in latched mode. The duration of the incoming reset signal must be at least 50 ms. PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST: This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable only if the pushbutton is in the Latched mode. PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY: This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in the latched mode. PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings. PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit pushbutton operation from the front panel pushbuttons. This locking functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset. PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting applies only to Self-Reset mode and specifies the duration of the pushbutton active status after the pushbutton has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton status; the length of time the operand remains on has no effect on the pulse duration. This setting is required to set the duration of the pushbutton operating pulse. PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL: This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive pushbutton LED. If this setting is Off, then LED operation is directly linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE: If pushbutton message is set to High Priority, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed undisturbed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted. The high priority option is not applicable to the PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting.
ID

This message can be temporary removed if any front panel keypad button is pressed. However, ten seconds of keypad inactivity will restore the message if the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is still active. If the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE is set to Normal, the message programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings will be displayed as long as PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand is asserted, but not longer than time period specified by FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. After the flash time is expired, the default message or other active target message is displayed. The instantaneous reset of the flash message will be executed if any relay front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT setting is linked to PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF operand and will be displayed in PUSHBTN 1 ID only if pushbutton element is in the Latched mode. The PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT message as Normal if the PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE setting is High Priority or Normal. conjunction with will be displayed

PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: If this setting is enabled, each pushbutton state change will be logged as an event into event recorder.

5-46

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS The user-programmable pushbutton logic is shown below.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF TIMER 200 ms 0 SETTING PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION = Enabled = Latched = Self-Reset

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

LATCHED
OR

LATCHED/SELF-RESET

To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A1

SETTING PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL Off = 0

AND

Non-volatile latch
S

SETTING PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE Off = 0 SETTING PUSHBTN 1 HOLD TPKP 0

AND

TIMER 50 ms
R

Latch

0
OR

TIMER 50 ms 0

SETTING PUSHBTN 1 SET Off = 0

AND

SETTING PUSHBTN 1 RESET Off = 0

OR
AND AND

PUSHBUTTON ON

To user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 2, 842024A1

SETTING SETTING PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST = Enabled = Disabled PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY TPKP
AND

5
SETTING PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT DELAY 0

0
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

TIMER 200 ms 0
AND

TRST
842021A2.CDR

Figure 59: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-47

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

LCD MESSAGE SETTING ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT = XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT = XXXXXXXXXX

LATCHED
OR AND

FLASH MESSAGE TIME 0 TRST

From user-programmable pushbuttons logic sheet 1, 842021A2

Instantaneous reset * FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF

LATCHED/SELF-RESET

AND

PUSHBUTTON ON

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

SETTING PUSHBUTTON 1 MESSAGE = Disabled = High Priority = Normal

The message is temporarily removed if any keypad button is pressed. Ten (10) seconds of keypad inactivity restores the message.
AND

LCD MESSAGE ENGAGE MESSAGE SETTINGS PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT = XXXXXXXXXX PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT = XXXXXXXXXX

SETTING FLASH MESSAGE TIME 0

AND

TRST Instantaneous reset * PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC

1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off. Pushbutton 1 LED

Instantaneous reset will be executed if any front panel button is pressed or any new target or message becomes active.

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 2 ON PUSHBUTTON 3 ON

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PUSHBUTTON 1 ON FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ANY PB ON

2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.

SETTING PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL = any FlexLogic operand

Pushbutton 1 LED

PUSHBUTTON 16 ON The enhanced front panel has 16 operands; the standard front panel has 12
842024A1.CDR

Figure 510: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTON LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2) User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP or HQ faceplate. If an HP or HQ type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the correct faceplate option. This can be done via EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command. 5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

NOTE

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

MESSAGE

PARAMETER Off PARAMETER Off

MESSAGE

1: 2:

Range: FlexLogic operand

PARAMETER 256: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.

5-48

G60 Generator Protection System

5-50

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS An example user display setup and result is shown below: USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

DISP 1 TOP LINE: Current X ~ A DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Current Y ~ A DISP 1 ITEM 1: 6016 DISP 1 ITEM 2: 6357 DISP 1 ITEM 3: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0

Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.

Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.

MESSAGE

Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.

MESSAGE

USER DISPLAYS

Current X Current Y

0.850 A 0.327 A

Shows the resultant display content.

5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS a) MAIN MENU

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Table 54: DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA RATES

MODULE 74 7L 7M 7P 7T 7W 7V 2A 2B 2G 2H 76 77 75 7E 7F 7G 7Q 7R 7S CHANNEL Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 SUPPORTED DATA RATES 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps, 128 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 128 kbps 128 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps

The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
NOTE

The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to G60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels. The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. Please refer to the Inputs and outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-53

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY

5 SETTINGS

Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.

TX1

UR IED 1
RX1

TX1

UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR

Figure 511: INPUT AND OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps

Yes

For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 128 kbps

Yes

The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422). EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.

UR IED 1

BLOCK

UR IED 2

UR IED 3

UR IED 4

842712A1.CDR

Figure 512: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.

5-54

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

TX1

RX1

UR IED 1
RX2 TX2

RX1

TX2

RX2

TX1

UR IED 2
TX1 RX2 TX2

UR IED 4
RX1

TX2

RX2

UR IED 3
RX1 TX1

842716A1.CDR

Figure 513: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 3:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 4:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of bridges between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum communications distance by a factor of two. In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle. If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle. A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature would be primarily used to address these concerns.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-55

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1

5 SETTINGS

UR IED 2

UR IED 3

842713A1.CDR

Figure 514: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):

TX1

RX1

RX2

UR IED 1
RX1 TX1

UR IED 2
TX2

5
RX1

UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR

Figure 515: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 3:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps): IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle. In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained in the Inputs and outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.

5-56

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

TX2

TX1

RX1

RX2

UR IED 1
RX1 RX2 TX2

UR IED 2
TX1

TX1

RX1

UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR

Figure 516: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 2:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

For UR-series IED 3:

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle. The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture. b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O CRC ALARM CH1(2)

5-57

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly. The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual value. Message count and length of the monitoring window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600. Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 104 implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 104.

c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)

UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

The G60 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly. The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.

5-58

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP TELEPROTECTION

TELEPROTECTION
MESSAGE

TELEPROTECTION FUNCTION: Disabled NUMBER OF TERMINALS: 2 NUMBER OF COMM CHANNELS: 1 LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: 2, 3

Range: 1, 2

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible. Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive as such, they cannot be used simulatneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and vice versa.

NOTE

NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers. NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is 3 (three-terminal system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 (redundant channels). LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installations that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS CHANNEL TESTS VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual value. The default value of 0 for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked. On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end. 5.2.18 INSTALLATION

PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION
MESSAGE

RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed RELAY NAME: Relay-1

Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-59

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state. The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.

5-60

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.3SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(M5)

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 AC INPUTS

CURRENT BANK F1
MESSAGE

PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY:

Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A

PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A

Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 A, 5 A

MESSAGE

Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE

Four banks of phase and ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = neutral current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to chapter 3 for more details on CT connections. Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used). The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks: F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio. F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio. M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio.

The following rule applies: SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1

(EQ 5.6)

1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary. The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-61

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP b) VOLTAGE BANKS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)

5 SETTINGS

VOLTAGE BANK F5
MESSAGE

PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION: Wye PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1 AUXILIARY VT F5 CONNECTION: Vag AUXILIARY VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V AUXILIARY VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1

Range: Wye, Delta

Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

MESSAGE

Range: 25.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION

Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter):

Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}. See the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION made to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta. The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary. For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115; that is, (13800 / 14400) 120. For a wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4. On a 14.4 kV system with a delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120; that is, 14400 / 120. 5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM

NOTE

POWER SYSTEM
MESSAGE

NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz PHASE ROTATION: ABC REVERSE PH ROTATION: Off FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: SRC 1 FREQUENCY TRACKING: Enabled

Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

Range: ABC, ACB

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

5-62

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay. The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation. The REVERSE PH ROTATION setting allows the user to dynamically change the phase rotation. For example, if the nominal phase rotation is ABC but the condition defined for opposite phase rotation is true, then the phase rotation will switch to ACB. This feature is only intended for use in special applications such as pumped storage schemes. The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current. For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2 V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions. The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay. Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE

should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.

5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(4)

SOURCE 1
MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 NAME: SRC 1 SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: None SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: None SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: None SOURCE 1 AUX VT: None

Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5 Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5 Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGE

Identical menus are available for each source. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source. The first letter in the source identifier represents the module slot position. The number directly following this letter represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept. It is possible to select the sum of all CT combinations. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-63

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together. User selection of AC parameters for comparator elements: CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS. AC input actual values: The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values. DISTURBANCE DETECTORS (INTERNAL): The disturbance detector (ANSI 50DD) element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. The 50DD function is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each source. The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme logic is as follows:

SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 1 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 2 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 2 50DD OP OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC 1 50DD OP

SETTING ACTUAL SOURCE 6 CURRENT PHASOR I_1 I_2 I_0 PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY PROPERTIES/CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL I_1 - I_1 >2*CUT-OFF I_2 - I_2 >2*CUT-OFF I_0 - I_0 >2*CUT-OFF Where I is 2 cycles old
827092A3.CDR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR SRC 6 50DD OP

Figure 517: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector accordingly. EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES: An example of the use of sources is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 CTs CT/VT MODULE 2 VTs CT/VT MODULE 3 not applicable

5-64

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

This configuration could be used on a two-winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1 DSP Bank

F5 Source 1 Amps Source 3

51BF-1 51BF-2

Source 2 Amps

Volts Amps
A V W Var 87T

V A W Var 51P

Volts Amps M1 M1 Source 4

UR Relay
M5

Figure 518: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-65

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.3.4 BREAKERS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP BREAKERS BREAKER 1

BREAKER 1
MESSAGE

BREAKER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Disabled BREAKER 1 NAME: Bkr 1 BREAKER 1 MODE: 3-Pole BREAKER 1 OPEN: Off BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN: Off BREAKER 1 CLOSE: Off BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE: Off BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD: Off BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND: Off BREAKER 1 B CLOSED: Off BREAKER 1 B OPENED: Off BREAKER 1 C CLOSED: Off BREAKER 1 C OPENED: Off BREAKER 1 Toperate: 0.070 s BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM: Off BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY: 0.000 s MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: 0.000 s BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV: Off BREAKER 1 EVENTS: Disabled

5-66

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

C60, D60, L60, and L90 relays from recloser

BREAKER 1 MNL CLS

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AR CLOSE BKR 1 SETTING BREAKER 1 BLOCK CLOSE Off = 0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR AND

BREAKER 1 ON CMD
827061AR.CDR

Figure 519: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 2)

5-68

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

from breaker control logic sheet 1, 827061AR

BKR ENABLED

SETTING BREAKER 1 MODE

= 3-Pole = 1-Pole

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR AND

BREAKER 1 CLOSED

BREAKER 1 CLOSED (DEFAULT)

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND OR

BREAKER 1 OPEN

SETTING BREAKER 1 A/3P CLSD = Off

AND

BREAKER 1 OPEN (DEFAULT)

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

BREAKER 1 DISCREP

SETTING BREAKER 1 B CLSD

= Off

SETTING BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY

AND

0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING BREAKER 1 C CLSD

= Off
OR AND AND

BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
Note: the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE LED can be latched using FlexLogic

BREAKER 1 TROUBLE (DEFAULT)

SETTING BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM

= Off
XOR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate

AND OR

BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING BREAKER 1 A/3P OPND = Off

0
AND

AND AND AND

BREAKER 1 A BAD ST BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 A OPEN BREAKER 1 A INTERM

SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND

XOR

SETTING BREAKER 1 B OPENED = Off

0
AND

AND AND AND

BREAKER 1 B BAD ST BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 B OPEN BREAKER 1 B INTERM

SETTING BREAKER 1 Toperate

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND XOR

SETTING BREAKER 1 C OPENED = Off

0
AND

AND AND AND

BREAKER 1 C BAD ST BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 C OPEN BREAKER 1 C INTERM

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND

SETTING BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV

= Off

AND XOR AND

BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 1P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS

842025A1.CDR

Figure 520: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 2)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-69

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.3.5 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SWITCHES SWITCH 1

SWITCH 1
MESSAGE

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

SWITCH 1 OPEN: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open disconnect switch 1. SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN: This setting selects an operand that prevents opening of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. SWITCH 1 CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close disconnect switch 1. SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE: This setting selects an operand that prevents closing of the disconnect switch. This setting can be used for select-before-operate functionality or to block operation from a panel switch or from SCADA. SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary position tracking mechanism. This input should be a normally-open 52/a status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as 3-Pole, this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively. SWITCH 1 A/3P OPND: This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that should be a normally-closed 52/b status input to create a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted SWITCH 1 CLOSED status signal can be used. SWITCH 1 B CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 B OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 C CLOSED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 C OPENED: If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as above for phase A. SWITCH 1 Toperate: This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a and 52/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted from alarm or blocking purposes. SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY: This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three-pole position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-71

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

SETTING SWITCH 1 FUNCTION = Disabled = Enabled SETTING SWITCH 1 OPEN

= Off
OR AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 OFF CMD

SETTING SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN

= Off

61850 Select & Open

SETTING SWITCH 1 CLOSE

= Off
OR AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 ON CMD

SETTING SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE

= Off

61850 Select & Close

SETTING SWITCH 1 MODE

= 3-Pole = 1-Pole

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND OR AND

SWITCH 1 CLOSED

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND AND OR

SWITCH 1 OPEN

SETTING SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD

= Off
AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND

SWITCH 1 DISCREP

SETTING SWITCH 1 B CLOSED

= Off

SETTING SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY

AND

0
OR AND AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SWITCH 1 TROUBLE

SETTING SWITCH 1 C CLOSED

= Off

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate

AND OR

SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

SETTING SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND

= Off

XOR

0
AND

AND AND AND

SWITCH 1 A BAD ST SWITCH 1 A CLSD SWITCH 1 A OPEN SWITCH 1 A INTERM

SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND

SETTING SWITCH 1 B OPENED

= Off

XOR

0
AND

AND AND AND

SWITCH 1 B BAD ST SWITCH 1 B CLSD SWITCH 1 B OPEN SWITCH 1 B INTERM

SETTING SWITCH 1 Toperate

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND

SETTING SWITCH 1 C OPENED

= Off

XOR

0
AND

AND AND

SWITCH 1 C BAD ST SWITCH 1 C CLSD SWITCH 1 C OPEN SWITCH 1 C INTERM

AND

AND 842026A3.CDR

Figure 521: DISCONNECT SWITCH SCHEME LOGIC

5-72

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.6 FLEXCURVES

a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D)

FLEXCURVE A

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms

Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to reset and operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 and 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into two continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the reset and operate times (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE UP/DOWN keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D). Table 55: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 TIME MS RESET 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 TIME MS OPERATE 1.03 1.05 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 TIME MS OPERATE 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 TIME MS OPERATE 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 TIME MS OPERATE 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 TIME MS

NOTE

The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1; that is, 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-73

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting. Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup. c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING Recloser curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The recloser curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.

Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times

Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time. High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the operating time.
842721A1.CDR

Figure 522: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION The multiplier and adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT ratio.
NOTE

5-74

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS d) EXAMPLE

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at eight (8) times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately four (4) times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).

842719A1.CDR

Figure 523: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.

842720A1.CDR

Figure 524: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE

e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES The standard recloser curves available for the G60 are displayed in the following graphs.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-75

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

2 1 0.5
GE106

TIME (sec)

0.2 0.1 0.05

GE103 GE104 GE105

GE101

GE102

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2

5
50

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842723A1.CDR

Figure 525: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

20 10 5

GE142

GE138

TIME (sec)

2 1
GE113 GE120

0.5

0.2 0.1 0.05 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842725A1.CDR

Figure 526: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

5-76

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

TIME (sec)

GE201

GE151

2
GE134 GE140 GE137

0.5 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20

842730A1.CDR

Figure 527: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201

GE152

TIME (sec)

GE141

GE131

GE200

2 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842728A1.CDR

Figure 528: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-77

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

50 20 10 5 2
GE162

GE164

TIME (sec)

1 0.5
GE133

0.2 0.1 0.05

GE161

GE165

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2

GE163

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842729A1.CDR

Figure 529: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20 10 5 2

GE132

TIME (sec)

1 0.5 0.2
GE136 GE139

0.1
GE116

0.05
GE118

GE117

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20

842726A1.CDR

Figure 530: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

5-78

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

20 10 5
GE122

TIME (sec)

1 0.5
GE114

0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
GE121 GE111

GE107

GE115

GE112

842724A1.CDR

Figure 531: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122

20
GE202

TIME (sec)

2 1 0.5

GE119

GE135

0.2 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

842727A1.CDR

Figure 532: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-79

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.3.7 PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT

MESSAGE

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 REPORTING OVER NETWORK

See below. See page 5-95.

The G60 Generator Protection System is provided with an optional phasor measurement unit feature. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. The number of phasor measurement units available is also dependent on this option. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details.

The PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT menu allows specifying basic parameters of the measurements process such as signal source, ID and station name, calibration data, triggering, recording, and content for transmission on each of the supported ports. The reporting ports menus allow specifying the content and rate of reporting on each of the supported ports. Precise IRIG-B input is vital for correct synchrophasor measurement and reporting. A DC level shift IRIG-B receiver must be used for the phasor measurement unit to output proper synchrophasor values.
NOTE

The PMU settings are organized in five logical groups as follows.

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1

PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1

MESSAGE

PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION PMU 1 CALIBRATION PMU 1 COMMUNICATION PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 RECORDING

See page 5-81. See page 5-82. See page 5-83. See page 5-85. See page 5-92.

MESSAGE

5-80

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) BASIC CONFIGURATION

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

PMU 1 BASIC CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

PMU 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 IDCODE: 1 PMU 1 STN: GE-UR-PMU PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PMU 1 POST-FILTER: Symm-3-point

Range: Enabled, Disabled

Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1

Range: 16 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: available post-filters as per table below

MESSAGE

This section contains basic phasor measurement unit (PMU) data, such as functions, source settings, and names. PMU 1 FUNCTION: This setting enables the PMU 1 functionality. Any associated functions (such as the recorder or triggering comparators) will not function if this setting is Disabled. Use the command frame to force the communication portion of the feature to start/stop transmission of data. When the transmission is turned off, the PMU is fully operational in terms of calculating and recording the phasors. PMU 1 IDCODE: This setting assigns a numerical ID to the PMU. It corresponds to the IDCODE field of the data, configuration, header, and command frames of the C37.118 protocol. The PMU uses this value when sending data, configuration, and header frames and responds to this value when receiving the command frame. PMU 1 STN: This setting assigns an alphanumeric ID to the PMU station. It corresponds to the STN field of the configuration frame of the C37.118 protocol. This value is a 16-character ASCII string as per the C37.118 standard. PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting specifies one of the available G60 signal sources for processing in the PMU. Note that any combination of voltages and currents can be configured as a source. The current channels could be configured as sums of physically connected currents. This facilitates PMU applications in breaker-and-a-half, ring-bus, and similar arrangements. The PMU feature calculates voltage phasors for actual voltage (A, B, C, and auxiliary) and current (A, B, C, and ground) channels of the source, as well as symmetrical components (0, 1, and 2) of both voltages and currents. When configuring communication and recording features of the PMU, the user could select from the above superset the content to be sent out or recorded. PMU 1 POST-FILTER: This setting specifies amount of post-filtering applied to raw synchrophasor measurements. The raw measurements are produced at the rate of nominal system frequency using one-cycle data windows. This setting is provided to deal with interfering frequencies and to balance speed and accuracy of synchrophasor measurements for different applications. The following filtering choices are available: Table 56: POST-FILTER CHOICES
SELECTION None Symm-3-point Symm-5-point Symm-7-point CHARACTERISTIC OF THE FILTER No post-filtering Symmetrical 3-point filter (1 historical point, 1 present point, 1 future point) Symmetrical 5-point filter (2 historical points, 1 present point, 2 future points) Symmetrical 7-point filter (3 historical points, 1 present point, 3 future points)

This setting applies to all channels of the PMU. It is effectively for recording and transmission on all ports configured to use data of this PMU.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-81

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP c) CALIBRATION

5 SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) PMU 1 CALIBRATION

PMU 1 CALIBRATION
MESSAGE

Range: 180 to 180 in steps of 30

This menu contains user angle calibration data for the phasor measurement unit (PMU). This data is combined with the factory adjustments to shift the phasors for better accuracy. PMU 1 VA... IG CALIBRATION ANGLE: These settings recognize applications with protection class voltage and current sources, and allow the user to calibrate each channel (four voltages and four currents) individually to offset errors introduced by VTs, CTs, and cabling. The setting values are effectively added to the measured angles. Therefore, enter a positive correction of the secondary signal lags the true signal; and negative value if the secondary signal leads the true signal. PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive- and negative-sequence voltages for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU voltage point, and the reference node. This angle is effectively added to the positive-sequence voltage angle, and subtracted from the negative-sequence voltage angle. Note that: 1. 2. 3. 4. When this setting is not 0, the phase and sequence voltages will not agree. Unlike sequence voltages, the phase voltages cannot be corrected in a general case, and therefore are reported as measured. When receiving synchrophasor date at multiple locations, with possibly different reference nodes, it may be more beneficial to allow the central locations to perform the compensation of sequence voltages. This setting applies to PMU data only. The G60 calculates symmetrical voltages independently for protection and control purposes without applying this correction. When connected to line-to-line voltages, the PMU calculates symmetrical voltages with the reference to the AG voltage, and not to the physically connected AB voltage (see the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6).

PMU 1 SEQ CURR SHIFT ANGLE: This setting allows correcting positive and negative-sequence currents for vector groups of power transformers located between the PMU current point and the reference node. The setting has the same meaning for currents as the PMU 1 SEQ VOLT SHIFT ANGLE setting has for voltages. Normally, the two correcting angles are set identically, except rare applications when the voltage and current measuring points are located at different windings of a power transformer.

5-82

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS d) PMU COMMUNICATION

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 COMMUNICATION PMU 1 COMM PORT

PMU 1 COMM PORT 1

MESSAGE

PMU1 COMM PORT: None PMU1 PORT PHS-1 PMU 1 V1 PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM: GE-UR-PMU1-V1

MESSAGE

Range: None, Network

These settings allow for optimizing the frame size and maximizing transmission channel usage, depending on a given application. Select Off to suppress transmission of a given value. PMU1 PORT PHS-1 NM to PMU1 PORT PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. These names are typically based on station, bus, or breaker names. PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8: These settings specify any analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the data frame. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to send any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analog values are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant and sent as 32-bit floating point values. PMU1 PORT A-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel of the data frame. Up to sixteen digital channels can be configured to send any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. The values are mapped into a two-byte integer number, with byte 1 LSB corresponding to the digital channel 1 and byte 2 MSB corresponding to digital channel 16. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NM to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU1 PORT D-CH-1 NORMAL STATE to PMU1 PORT D-CH-16 NORMAL STATE: These settings allow for specifying a normal state for each digital channel. These states are transmitted in configuration frames to the data concentrator.

5-84

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS e) PMU TRIGGERING OVERVIEW

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 TRIGGERING

PMU 1 TRIGGERING
MESSAGE

PMU1 USER TRIGGER: Off PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

Range: FlexLogic operands

See page 5-86. See page 5-87. See page 5-88. See page 5-89. See page 5-91.

MESSAGE

Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) contains five triggering mechanisms to facilitate triggering of the associated PMU recorder, or cross-triggering of other PMUs of the system. They are: Overfrequency and underfrequency. Overvoltage and undervoltage. Overcurrent. Overpower. High rate of change of frequency.

The pre-configured triggers could be augmented with a user-specified condition built freely using programmable logic of the relay. The entire triggering logic is refreshed once every two power system cycles. All five triggering functions and the user-definable condition are consolidated (ORed) and connected to the PMU recorder. Each trigger can be programmed to log its operation into the event recorder, and to signal its operation via targets. The five triggers drive the STAT bits of the data frame to inform the destination of the synchrophasor data regarding the cause of trigger. The following convention is adopted to drive bits 11, 3, 2, 1, and 0 of the STAT word.
SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
bit 0 bit 3, bit 11

PMU 1 TRIGGERED
PMU 1 recorder

bit 1 bit 2

847004A1.CDR

Figure 533: STAT BITS LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-85

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP f) FREQUENCY TRIGGERING

5 SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER

PMU 1 FREQUENCY TRIGGER

MESSAGE

PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: 49.00 Hz PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: 61.00 Hz PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

The trigger responds to the frequency signal of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. The frequency is calculated from either phase voltages, auxiliary voltage, phase currents and ground current, in this hierarchy, depending on the source configuration as per G60 standards. This element requires the frequency is above the minimum measurable value. If the frequency is below this value, such as when the circuit is de-energized, the trigger will drop out. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: This setting specifies the low threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: This setting specifies the high threshold for the abnormal frequency trigger. The comparator applies a 0.03 Hz hysteresis. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 PMU 1 FREQ TRIG BLK: Off = 0 SETTING PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: FREQUENCY, f AND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER OR SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED

SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER LOW-FREQ: PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER HIGH-FREQ: RUN 0< f < LOW-FREQ OR f > HIGH-FREQ

SETTINGS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO

to STAT bits of the data frame

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER

847002A2.CDR

Figure 534: FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC

5-86

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS g) VOLTAGE TRIGGERING

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER

PMU 1 VOLTAGE TRIGGER

MESSAGE

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER LOW-VOLT: 0.800 pu PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER HIGH-VOLT: 1.200 pu PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 VOLT TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

Range: 0.250 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO

to STAT bits of the data frame

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER

847005A1.CDR

Figure 535: VOLTAGE TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC h) CURRENT TRIGGERING

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURRENT TRIGGER

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PICKUP: 1.800 pu PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 CURR TRIG BLK: Off PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled

Range: 0.100 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1
AND

PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED

SETTINGS PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: ACTIVE POWER, PA ACTIVE POWER, PB ACTIVE POWER, PC

PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER APPARENT: RUN abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > ACTIVE PICKUP abs(P) > 3*(ACTIVE PICKUP) abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP
OR

SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0

SETTINGS PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER
to STAT bits of the data frame

3P ACTIVE POWER, P REACTIVE POWER, QA REACTIVE POWER, QB REACTIVE POWER, QC 3P REACTIVE POWER, Q APPARENT POWER, SA APPARENT POWER, SB APPARENT POWER, SC 3P APPARENT POWER, S

abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > REACTIVE PICKUP abs(Q) > 3*(REACTIVE PICKUP) S > APPARENT PICKUP S > APPARENT PICKUP S > APPARENT PICKUP S > 3*(APPARENT PICKUP)

847003A1.CDR

Figure 537: POWER TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC

5-90

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS j) DF/DT TRIGGERING

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR MEASUREMENT... PMU 1 TRIGGERING PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER

MESSAGE

PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION: Disabled PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: 0.25 Hz/s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: 0.25 Hz/s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: 0.10 s PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: 1.00 s PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK: Off PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER TARGET: Self-Reset PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

This element responds to frequency rate of change. Separate thresholds are provided for rising and dropping frequency. The trigger responds to the rate of change of frequency (df/dt) of the phasor measurement unit (PMU) source. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the raising direction (positive df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the rate of change of frequency in the falling direction (negative df/dt). The comparator applies a 3% hysteresis. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: This setting could be used to filter out spurious conditions and avoid unnecessary triggering of the recorder. PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: This setting could be used to extend the trigger after the situation returned to normal. This setting is of particular importance when using the recorder in the forced mode (recording as long as the triggering condition is asserted).
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PMU 1 FREQ TRIGGER PMU 1 VOLT TRIGGER PMU 1 CURR TRIGGER SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 PMU 1 df/dt TRG BLK: Off = 0 SETTING PMU 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: ROCOF, df/dt AND PMU 1 POWER TRIGGER OR SETTING PMU 1 USER TRIGGER: Off = 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 TRIGGERED

SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER RAISE: PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER FALL: RUN df/dt > RAISE OR df/dt > FALL

SETTINGS PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER PKP TIME: PMU 1 df/dt TRIGGER DPO TIME: tPKP tDPO

to STAT bits of the data frame

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PMU 1 ROCOF TRIGGER

847000A1.CDR

Figure 538: RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY TRIGGER SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-91

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP k) PMU RECORDING

5 SETTINGS

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1 PMU 1 RECORDING

PMU 1 RECORDING
MESSAGE

PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: 10/sec PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: 10 PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: 10% PMU 1 REC PHS-1: PMU 1 V1 PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM: GE-UR-PMU-V1

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second Range: 2 to 128 in steps of 1

Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: 16 character ASCII string

MESSAGE

Each logical phasor measurement unit (PMU) is associated with a recorder. The triggering condition is programmed via the PMU 1 TRIGGERING menu. The recorder works with polar values using resolution as in the PMU actual values.

5-92

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

TRIGGER

REC

847709A2.CDR

Figure 539: PMU RECORDING PMU 1 RECORDING RATE: This setting specifies the recording rate for the record content. Not all recording rates are applicable to either 50 or 60 Hz systems (for example, recording at 25 phasors a second in a 60 Hz system). The relay supports decimation by integer number of phasors from the nominal system frequency. If the rate of 25 is selected for the 60 Hz system, the relay would decimate the rate of 60 phasors a second by round (60 / 25) = 2; that is, it would record at 60 / 2 = 30 phasors a second. PMU 1 NO OF TIMED RECORDS: This setting specifies how many timed records are available for a given logical PMU. The length of each record equals available memory divided by the content size and number of records. The higher the number of records, the shorter each record. The relay supports a maximum of 128 records. PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE: This setting specifies what happens when the recorder uses its entire available memory storage. If set to Automatic Overwrite, the last record is erased to facilitate new recording, when triggered. If set to Protected, the recorder stops creating new records when the entire memory is used up by the old un-cleared records. Refer to chapter 7 for more information on clearing PMU records. The following set of figures illustrate the concept of memory management via the PMU 1 TRIGGER MODE setting.
Total memory for all logical PMUs Memory available for the logical PMU

5
Other logical PMUs

Record 1 Record 1 Record 1 Record 6

Record 2 Record 2 Record 2 Record 2

Record 3 Record 3 Record 3 Record 3

Free Free memory memory Record 4 Record 4 Record 4 Free memory Record 5 Record 5

Other logical PMUs

847705A1.CDR

Figure 540: AUTOMATIC OVERWRITE MODE

Total memory for all logical PMUs Memory available for the logical PMU

Record 1 Record 1 Record 1

Record 2 Record 2 Record 2

Record 3 Record 3 Record 3

Free Free memory memory Record 4 Record 4 Free memory Record 5

Other logical PMUs

847706A1.CDR

No further recording after all allocated memory is used

Figure 541: PROTECTED MODE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-93

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

PMU 1 TIMED TRIGGER POSITION: This setting specifies the amount of pre-trigger data in percent of the entire record. PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-1 to PMU1 PORT 1 PHS-14: These settings specify synchrophasors to be recorded from the superset of all synchronized measurements as indicated in the following table. These settings allow for optimizing the record size and content depending on a given application. Select Off to suppress recording of a given value.
VALUE Va Vb Vc Vx Ia Ib Ic Ig V1 V2 V0 I1 I2 I0 DESCRIPTION First voltage channel, either Va or Vab Second voltage channel, either Vb or Vbc Third voltage channel, either Vc or Vca Fourth voltage channel Phase A current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase B current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Phase C current, physical channel or summation as per the source settings Fourth current channel, physical or summation as per the source settings Positive-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Negative-sequence voltage, referenced to Va Zero-sequence voltage Positive-sequence current, referenced to Ia Negative-sequence current, referenced to Ia Zero-sequence current

PMU 1 REC PHS-1 NM to PMU 1 REC PHS-14 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the synchrophasor channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. Typically these names would be based on station, bus, or breaker names. PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8: These settings specify analog data measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable analog channel of the record. Up to eight analog channels can be configured to record any FlexAnalog value from the relay. Examples include active and reactive power, per phase or three-phase power, power factor, temperature via RTD inputs, and THD. The configured analogs are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. PMU 1 REC A-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC A-CH-8 NM: These settings allow for custom naming of the analog channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame. PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16: These settings specify any digital flag measured by the relay to be included as a user-selectable digital channel in the record. Up to digital analog channels can be configured to record any FlexLogic operand from the relay. The configured digital flags are sampled concurrently with the synchrophasor instant. PMU 1 REC D-CH-1 NM to PMU 1 REC D-CH-16 NM: This setting allows custom naming of the digital channels. Sixteen-character ASCII strings are allowed as in the CHNAM field of the configuration frame.

5-94

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS l) NETWORK CONNECTION

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP PHASOR... PHASOR MEASUREMENT UNIT 1(4) REPORTING OVER NETWORK

REPORTING OVER NETWORK

MESSAGE

NETWORK REPORTING FUNCTION: Disabled NETWORK REPORTING IDCODE: 1 NETWORK REPORTING RATE: 10 per sec NETWORK REPORTING STYLE: Polar NETWORK REPORTING FORMAT: Integer NETWORK PDC CONTROL: Disabled NETWORK TCP PORT: 4712 NETWORK UDP PORT: 4713

Range: Enabled, Disabled

Range: 1 to 65534 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 50, or 60 times per second Range: Polar, Rectangular

5-95

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC

To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.

Figure 542: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW The states of all digital signals used in the G60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators. If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

5-96

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic). FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback. A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle. Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below. Table 57: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE Contact Input STATE On Off Contact Output (type Form-A contact only) Voltage On Voltage Off Current On Current Off Direct Input Element (Analog) On Pickup EXAMPLE FORMAT Cont Ip On Cont Ip Off Cont Op 1 VOn Cont Op 1 VOff Cont Op 1 IOn Cont Op 1 IOff DIRECT INPUT 1 On PHASE TOC1 PKP CHARACTERISTICS [INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...] Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed). Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open). Voltage exists across the contact. Voltage does not exists across the contact. Current is flowing through the contact. Current is not flowing through the contact. The direct input is presently in the ON state. The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The output of the comparator is set to the block function. The input operand is at logic 1. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The number of pulses counted is above the set number. The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number. The number of pulses counted is below the set number. Logic 1 Logic 0 The remote input is presently in the ON state. The virtual input is presently in the ON state. The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").

Dropout Operate

PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 OP

Block Element (Digital) Pickup Dropout Operate

PHASE TOC1 BLK Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 1 OP

Element (Digital Counter)

Higher than Equal to Lower than On Off On On On

Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO On Off REMOTE INPUT 1 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Op 1 On

Fixed Remote Input Virtual Input Virtual Output

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-97

5.4 FLEXLOGIC The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table. Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 8)
OPERAND TYPE CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS OPERAND SYNTAX CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 6 ON CONTROL PUSHBTN 7 ON DIRECT DEVICE 1On DIRECT DEVICE 16On DIRECT DEVICE 1Off DIRECT DEVICE 16Off DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM DIR IO CRC ALARM DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM DIR IO UNRET ALM ELEMENT: 100% stator ground 100% STATOR STG1 PKP 100% STATOR STG1 OP 100% STATOR STG1 DPO 100% STATOR STG2 PKP 100% STATOR STG2 OP 100% STATOR STG2 DPO 100% STATOR PKP 100% STATOR OP 100% STATOR DPO 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP 3RD HARM NTRL UV OP 3RD HARM NTRL UV DPO ACCDNT ENRG ARMED ACCDNT ENRG DPO ACCDNT ENRG OP AUX OV1 PKP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 OP AUX OV2 to AUX OV3 ELEMENT: Auxiliary undervoltage AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP AUX UV2 to AUX UV3 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed Control pushbutton 6 is being pressed Control pushbutton 7 is being pressed Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1

5 SETTINGS

DIRECT DEVICES

DIRECT INPUT/ OUTPUT CHANNEL MONITORING

The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of direct input messages failing the CRC exceeded the userspecified level on channel 1 or 2. The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). The rate of returned direct input/output messages exceeded the userspecified level on channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only). Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has picked up Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has operated Stage 1 of the 100% stator ground element has dropped out Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has picked up Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has operated Stage 2 of the 100% stator ground element has dropped out The 100% stator ground element has picked up The 100% stator ground element has operated The 100% stator ground element has dropped out Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has picked up Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has operated Third harmonic neutral undervoltage element has dropped out The accidental energization element is armed The accidental energization element has dropped out The accidental energization element has operated Auxiliary overvoltage element has picked up Auxiliary overvoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary overvoltage element has operated Same set of operands as shown for AUX OV1 Auxiliary undervoltage element has picked up Auxiliary undervoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary undervoltage element has operated Same set of operands as shown for AUX UV1

5
ELEMENT: Third harmonic neutral undervoltage ELEMENT: Accidental energization ELEMENT: Auxiliary overvoltage

5-98

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 8)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Breaker control OPERAND SYNTAX BREAKER 1 OFF CMD BREAKER 1 ON CMD BREAKER 1 A BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 A CLSD BREAKER 1 A OPEN BREAKER 1 B BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 B CLSD BREAKER 1 B OPEN BREAKER 1 C BAD ST BREAKER 1 A INTERM BREAKER 1 C CLSD BREAKER 1 C OPEN BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS BREAKER 1 CLOSED BREAKER 1 OPEN BREAKER 1 DISCREP BREAKER 1 TROUBLE BREAKER 1 MNL CLS BREAKER 1 TRIP A BREAKER 1 TRIP B BREAKER 1 TRIP C BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN BREAKER 1 OOS BREAKER 2... ELEMENT: Digital counters Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO Counter 2 to Counter 8 ELEMENT: Digital elements Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 2 to Dig Element 48 ELEMENT: Sensitive directional power DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP DIR POWER 1 PKP DIR POWER 1 DPO DIR POWER 1 OP DIR POWER 2 ELEMENT: Frequency out-ofband accumulation FREQ OOB BAND 1 PKP FREQ OOB BAND 1 DPO FREQ OOB BAND 1 OP FREQ OOB ACCUM PKP FREQ OOB ACCUM OP FREQ OOB BAND 2... ELEMENT Frequency rate of change ELEMENT: FlexElements FREQ RATE 1 PKP FREQ RATE 1 DPO FREQ RATE 1 OP FREQ RATE 2 to FREQ RATE 4 FxE 1 PKP FxE 1 OP FxE 1 DPO FxE 2 to FxE 16 OPERAND DESCRIPTION

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5-102

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 6 of 8)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Split phase protection OPERAND SYNTAX SPLIT PHASE A PKP SPLIT PHASE A DPO SPLIT PHASE A OP SPLIT PHASE B PKP SPLIT PHASE B DPO SPLIT PHASE B OP SPLIT PHASE C PKP SPLIT PHASE C DPO SPLIT PHASE C OP SPLIT PHASE OP SPLIT PHASE PKP SPLIT PHASE DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL to SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL ELEMENT: Stator differential STATOR DIFF OP STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF OP A STATOR DIFF OP B STATOR DIFF OP C STATOR DIFF DPO A STATOR DIFF DPO B STATOR DIFF DPO C STATOR DIFF SAT A STATOR DIFF SAT B STATOR DIFF SAT C STATOR DIFF DIR A STATOR DIFF DIR B STATOR DIFF DIR C SWITCH 1 OFF CMD SWITCH 1 ON CMD SWITCH 1 A BAD ST SWITCH 1 A INTERM SWITCH 1 A CLSD SWITCH 1 A OPEN SWITCH 1 B BAD ST SWITCH 1 B INTERM SWITCH 1 B CLSD SWITCH 1 B OPEN SWITCH 1 C BAD ST SWITCH 1 C INTERM SWITCH 1 C CLSD SWITCH 1 C OPEN SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS SWITCH 1 CLOSED SWITCH 1 OPEN SWITCH 1 DISCREP SWITCH 1 TROUBLE SWITCH 2... ELEMENT: Synchrocheck SYNC 1 DEAD S OP SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 1 SYNC DPO SYNC 1 CLS OP SYNC 1 CLS DPO SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX SYNC 2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Phase A of the split phase protection has picked up Phase A of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase A of the split phase protection has operated Phase B of the split phase protection has picked up Phase B of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase B of the split phase protection has operated Phase C of the split phase protection has picked up Phase C of the split phase protection has dropped out Phase C of the split phase protection has operated The split phase protection has operated The split phase protection has picked up The split phase protection has dropped out

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

ELEMENT: VTFF (Voltage transformer fuse failure)

Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has operated Source 1 VT fuse failure detector has dropped out Source 1 has lost voltage signals (V2 below 15% AND V1 below 5% of nominal) Same set of operands as shown for SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL At least one phase of stator differential has operated Phase A of stator differential has picked up Phase B of stator differential has picked up Phase C of stator differential has picked up Phase A of stator differential has operated Phase B of stator differential has operated Phase C of stator differential has operated Phase A of stator differential has dropped out Phase B of stator differential has dropped out Phase C of stator differential has dropped out Phase A of stator differential has is saturated Phase B of stator differential has is saturated Phase C of stator differential has is saturated Phase A of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied Phase B of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied Phase C of stator differential phase comparison has been satisfied Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and 52/b contacts) Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one position to another) Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole Disconnect switch 1 is closed Disconnect switch 1 is open Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1 Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 close has operated Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1

ELEMENT: Disconnect switch

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-103

5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 7 of 8)

OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Teleprotection channel tests OPERAND SYNTAX TELEPRO CH1 FAIL TELEPRO CH2 FAIL TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On TRIP BUS 1 PKP TRIP BUS 1 OP TRIP BUS 2... ELEMENT: Underfrequency UNDERFREQ 1 PKP UNDERFREQ 1 OP UNDERFREQ 1 DPO UNDERFREQ 2 to 6 ELEMENT: Volts per hertz VOLT PER HERTZ 1 PKP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 OP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 DPO VOLT PER HERTZ 2 FIXED OPERANDS Off On INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact inputs Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 On On Off Off IOn IOn IOff IOff VOn VOn VOff VOff OPERAND DESCRIPTION Channel 1 failed Channel 2 failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1 CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2 CRC detected lost packet on channel 1 CRC detected lost packet on channel 2 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up. Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates. Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1 Underfrequency 1 has picked up Underfrequency 1 has operated Underfrequency 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1 above The volts per hertz element 1 has picked up The volts per hertz element 1 has operated The volts per hertz element 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as VOLT PER HERTZ 1 above

5 SETTINGS

ELEMENT: Teleprotection inputs/outputs

ELEMENT Trip bus

Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as Disable by other features. Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting. (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1

INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact outputs, current (from detector on form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact outputs, voltage (from detector on form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS Direct inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual outputs

DIRECT INPUT 1 On DIRECT INPUT 32 On REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 64 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 96 On

5-104

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Table 58: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 8 of 8)

OPERAND TYPE LED INDICATORS: Fixed front panel LEDs OPERAND SYNTAX LED IN SERVICE LED TROUBLE LED TEST MODE LED TRIP LED ALARM LED PICKUP LED VOLTAGE LED CURRENT LED FREQUENCY LED OTHER LED PHASE A LED PHASE B LED PHASE C LED NEUTRAL/GROUND LED TEST IN PROGRESS LED USER 1 LED USER 2 to 48 REMOTE DEVICE 1 On REMOTE DEVICE 16 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off RESETTING RESET OP RESET OP (COMMS) RESET OP (OPERAND) RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) SELFDIAGNOSTICS ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF-TESTS BATTERY FAIL DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK DSP ERROR EEPROM DATA ERROR EQUIPMENT MISMATCH ETHERNET SWITCH FAIL FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG-B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR LOW ON MEMORY NO DSP INTERRUPTS PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROGRAM MEMORY PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE REMOTE DEVICE OFF SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION UNIT NOT CALIBRATED UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED WATCHDOG ERROR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF ANY PB ON PUSHBUTTON 2 to 12 OPERAND DESCRIPTION

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on. Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PICKUP LED is on. Asserted when the front panel VOLTAGE LED is on. Asserted when the front panel CURRENT LED is on. Asserted when the front panel FREQUENCY LED is on. Asserted when the front panel OTHER LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE A LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE B LED is on. Asserted when the front panel PHASE C LED is on. Asserted when the front panel NEUTRAL/GROUND LED is on. An LED test has been initiated and has not finished. Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on. The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48. Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below). Communications source of the reset command. Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu) source of the reset command. Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command. Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error) Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error) Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error) See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets See description in Chapter 7: Commands and targets Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected level of the relay. Pushbutton number 1 is in the On position Pushbutton number 1 is in the Off position Any of twelve pushbuttons is in the On position Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1

LED INDICATORS: LED test LED INDICATORS: User-programmable LEDs REMOTE DEVICES

UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS ALARM USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic operands table above. The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic operators table.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-105

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

Table 59: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS

GATES NOT OR AND NOR NAND XOR NUMBER OF INPUTS 1 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF... input is 0 any input is 1 all inputs are 1 all inputs are 0 any input is 0 only one input is 1

Table 510: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS

TYPE Editor End One-shot SYNTAX INSERT DELETE END DESCRIPTION Insert a parameter in an equation list. Delete a parameter from an equation list. The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters. One shot that responds to a negative going edge. One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges. Logical NOT 2 input OR gate 16 input OR gate 2 input AND gate 16 input AND gate 2 input NOR gate 16 input NOR gate 2 input NAND gate 16 input NAND gate 2 input Exclusive OR gate Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a one shot is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of 64 one shots. Operates on the previous parameter. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the reset input. The parameter preceding the reset input is the set input. The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is TIMER #. The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter NOTES

POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. NEGATIVE ONE SHOT DUAL ONE SHOT

Logic gate

NOT OR(2) OR(16) AND(2) AND(16) NOR(2) NOR(16) NAND(2) NAND(16) XOR(2) LATCH (S,R)

Timer

TIMER 1 TIMER 32 = Virt Op 1 = Virt Op 96

Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings. Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings. Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual output 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual output 96.

Assign virtual output

5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators. Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation. A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared.

5-106

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION

Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered. FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; that is, they reset on the re-application of control power. When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up. 5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation. In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used a virtual output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated Timer 1 AND Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827025A2.vsd

NOTE

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) Operate Output Relay H1

Figure 543: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME 1. Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2). Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a virtual output. For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (that is, contact output H1).

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-107

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and virtual output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated Timer 1 AND Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

Figure 544: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS 2. Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the virtual output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated

5
CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed

AND(2)

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

827027A2.VSD

Figure 545: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 3. Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as virtual output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup Timer 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 State=ON CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms)
827028A2.VSD

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms)

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

Figure 546: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 4. Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

5-108

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

01 02 03 04 05
.....

97 98 99
827029A1.VSD

Figure 547: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET 5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows: 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3." 98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower. 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next. 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact. The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP". Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for virtual output 3: [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3

It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 3 diagram as a check.

95 96 97 98 99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 2 OP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: NOT FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: AND (2) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 3

AND

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

827030A2.VSD

Figure 548: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6. Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4. 99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4". 98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-109

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3). 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1". 94: The input to timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R).

5 SETTINGS

92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter OR(4). 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2). 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP. 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On". 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On". 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On". 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On". The equation for virtual output 4 is: [85] [86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4

It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.

5-110

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 4 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 2 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Ip 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 1 PKP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: XOR FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (4) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: LATCH (S,R) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 1 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (3) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 2 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 4

Set LATCH XOR OR Reset

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

827031A2.VSD

Figure 549: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service. In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below: DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4 END In the expression above, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Protection System

5-111

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 8.

5 SETTINGS

The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator. The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations. 5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

MESSAGE

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END

1: 2:

Range: FlexLogic operands

MESSAGE

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: END

Range: FlexLogic operands

There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types. 5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS

PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)

FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
MESSAGE

TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0 TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: 0

Range: millisecond, second, minute

Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations. TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit. TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0". TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5-112

G60 Generator Protection System

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS

PATH: SETTING FLEXLOGIC FLEXELEMENTS FLEXELEMENT 1(16)

FLEXELEMENT 1
MESSAGE

FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: FxE1 FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: Signed FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: Level FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: Over FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS: 3.0% FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: milliseconds FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: 20 FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset FLEXELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: AND Off = 0 SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: RUN Actual Value FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Actual Value

SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT HYSTERESIS: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FxE 1 OP

+ -

tPKP tRST

FxE 1 DPO FxE 1 PKP

ACTUAL VALUE FlexElement 1 OpSig

842004A3.CDR

Figure 550: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal. The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases. The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.

5-114